DCR-TRV10E - Camcorder SONY - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL DCR-TRV10E SONY

Digital Video Camera Recorder Mini DV Cass

Operating Instructions

Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly, and retain it for future reference.

HCTPYKUNI NO 3KCNLYATALIN

Ipeed 3Kcnpnyatauene annapaTa BnHmATEbHO npOHTne, noXaJyncTa, daHHoe pyKOBOdTBO n COxpaHnTe erO dJaIbHeMIX CNpABOK.

Digital Handycam

InfoLITHIUM

Cassette

Memory

MEMORY STICK

DCR-TRV8E/TRV10E

Welcome!

Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony Digital Handycam camcorder. With your Digital Handycam, you can capture life's precious moments with superior picture and sound quality.

Your Digital Handycam is loaded with advanced features, but at the same time it is very easy to use. You will soon be producing home video that you can enjoy for years to come.

WARNING

To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.

To avoid electrical shock, do not open the cabinet.

Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.

NOTICE ON THE SUPPLIED AC POWER ADAPTOR FOR CUSTOMERS IN THE UNITED KINGDOM

A moulded plug complying with BS1363 is fitted to this equipment for your safety and convenience.

Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to be replaced, a 5 AMP fuse approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 (i.e., marked with 艹 or mark) must be used.

If the plug supplied with this equipment has a detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never use the plug without the fuse cover. If you should lose the fuse cover, please contact your nearest Sony service station.

ATTENTION

The electromagnetic fields at the specific frequencies may influence the picture and sound of this digital camcorder.

For the customers in Germany

Directive: EMC Directive 89/336/EEC. 92/31/EEC

This equipment complies with the EMC regulations when used under the following circumstances:

Residential area
Business district
- Light-industry district (This equipment complies with the EMC standard regulations EN55022 Class B.)

Добpo пожаловать!

I03dpaBnem BAc C npio6peTeHnEm daHHoB
BnDeokamepbl Digital Handycam pmpbSony.
C nOmoosbBoaew BnDeokamepbl Digital
Handycam Bb CMoxeTe 3aneuatnetb doporne
Bam MRHOBeHNJ Xn3HN C npEBOCXODhbIM
KaueCTBOM N3obpaxeHNJ N 3Byka.
BaAa BnDeokamepa Digital Handycam
OchaSeHa YCOBepseHCTBOBaHHbIMN
fynKUyMn, HO B TO Xe BpEme ee OChb JERKO
ncNoB3OBaTb.BCKope Bb 6yDete CO3daBaTb
CEMeHbIe BnDeOpnpaMMbI, KOToPbIMN
MOKeTe HacnaKDaTbc PocNe dyIOune rOdbI.

PNEyPPEKDEHNE

Длп п dedOTbpaSeHnBa 630ropaHnI INI ONaCHOCTN 3JIeKTPuYeCKOrO ydapa He BbICTaBnIte annapaT Ha DoJkb IINI Bnary.

Bo n36eKaHne nopaxeHn 3JIeKtpnuecknM TOKOM He OTKpbBaIte Kopnyc.

3a obcnyxnbAHnem o6paTaBcTolbKO K KBaINΦuIpuOBaHOMy obcnyxNBauOeMy nepcoHaNo.

BHIMAHNE

3JIeKtpomarHHTbIe NOIHa ONpeJeHbIX YacTOaX MOrYT BnIaTb Ha N3O6paXeHne I 3ByK,BOcPpON3B0DnMoE daHHo CnΦpOBoB BVNeOeKaMepbl.

A946

Table of contents

Checking supplied accessories 5

Quick Start Guide 6

Getting started

Using this manual. 10

Step 1 Preparing the power supply 12

Installing the battery pack 12

Charging the battery pack 13

Connecting to the mains 18

Step 2 Inserting a cassette. 19

Recording - Basics

Recording a picture 20

Shooting backlit subjects (BACK LIGHT) 27

Shooting in the dark (NightShot) 28

Checking the recording - END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec Review 31

Playback - Basics

Playing back a tape 33

Viewing the recording on TV 38

Advanced Recording Operations

Photo recording 41

Using the wide mode 44

Using the fader function 46

Using special effects -Picture effect 49

Using special effects - Digital effect 51

Adjusting the white balance manually. 54

Using the PROGRAM AE function 56

Adjusting the exposure manually 59

Focusing manually 60

AdvancedPlaybackOperations

Playing back a tape with picture effects 62

Playing back a tape with digital effects 63

Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function 65

Searching a recording by date - Date search..... 66

Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title - Title search 68

Searching for a photo - Photo search/Photo scan 69

Editing

Dubbing a tape 71

Editing partially on a DV tape - DV synchro-editing (DCR-TRV10E only) 74

Audio dubbing 76

Superimposing a title 79

Making your own titles. 83

Labeling a cassette 85

Customizing Your Camcorder

Changing the MENU settings 87

Resetting the date and time 98

Memory Stick operations (DCR-TRV10E only)

Using a Memory Stick-introduction 100

Recording still images on Memory Sticks - Memory photo recording 106

Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image 110

Copying still images from a mini DV tape
- Photo save 112

Viewing a still picture - Memory photo playback 114

Superimposing a still picture in a Memory Stick on a moving picture - M. CHROM/M. LUMI/ C. CHROM 118

Preventing accidental erasure - Image protection 121

Writing a print mark - PRINT MARK 123

Deleting images 124

Playing back images in a continuous loop -SLIDE SHOW 127

Additional Information

Usable cassettes 129

Troubleshooting 132

Self-diagnosis display 137

Warning indicators and messages 138

Using your camcorder abroad 148

Maintenance information and precautions..... 149

Specifications 154

Quick Reference

Identifying the parts and controls. 156

Quick Function Guide 168

Index 170

• Windows is registered trademarks licensed to Microsoft Corporation, registered in the U.S.A. and other countries.

• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Furthermore, "TM" and "®" are not mentioned in each case in this manual.

PpOBepKa npuIarapaembIX npHuaIeXHoCTeI.... 5

PykoBoIcTBo no 6bICTpomy 3anycky. 8

Iodrotobka K 3Kcnnyatauun

IcnoJIb3OBAHnE daHHoro pyKOBoDCTBa 10

IyHKT 1 IoJrTOBka NCTOuHnKa nITaHnJa. 12

UctaHOBka 6aTapeiHorO 6Ioka 12

3apka 6aTapeHoro 6loka 13

IpoDcoeINHeHne K cTeBoi po3eTke 18

IyHKT 2 YcTaHOBKa KacCEtbl 19

3aHcB - OCHOBHbIe NOLOXeHn

3aIncB n3o6paXeHnA 20

CbeMa o6BeKToB c 3aDHeI IOcBtKoI (BACK LIGHT) 27

CbeMka B TeMHoTe (HouHaar CbeMka) 28

Ponck n yctpaHene HencnpaBHOCTeI 140

HnDnKaun CaMoDaIaHOctu 145

PpeDynpexkdaHoune INHnKaTOpbln COO6eHnI 146

IcnoIb3OBAHne BaSei BnDeokamepbl 3a rpaHnuei 148

HnΦopMaζηno yxOy 3a annapaTOM m MepblnpoTOPOXHOCTN 149

Texnueckne xapaKTepcntuKn 155

OnepaTHBbI CNpaBOUHnK

Obo3haeHne yacTe n peryIaTOpOB 156

PykoBOCTBO NO 6bICTpbIM yHKnram 169

AilpaBHTbIy yKa3aTeIb 171

• Windows RNAIaeTc3aerncTpnpoBaHHoT ToproBOMapKo, npHaJnEkaeienΦnpMe Microsoft Corporation, 3aperncTpnpoBaHHoB CUSA ndpyrnx ctpaHax.

• Bce Ha3BaHnIu 3dEJIy, yNOMaHyTbIe B daHHHom pyKOBoDcTBe, MOrYT 6bITb TopROBbIMu MapKaMn IIN 3apeRInCTpnpoBaHbIMU TopROBbIMu MapKaMn COOTBeTCTByIOxN KOMNaHm.

K TOMy Jze, 3NaKn "TM" N "®" He yNOMnHaIOTcB KaKdOM CnyHae B DaHHOM pyKOBOdCTBe.

Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.

Y6eIntecb, cyTo cneIyUOuIe npHnAdIeKHOCTn npInaraiOTc K BaSei BnDeokampe.

1 RMT-812 or/unni RMT-809		2 RMT-809
3	4	5	6
7	8	9	10
11	12	13	14

1 Wireless Remote Commander (1) (p. 164)

RMT-812: DCR-TRV10E

RMT-809: DCR-TRV8E

2 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC power adaptor (1),

Mains lead (1) (p. 13)

NP-FM50 battery pack (1) (p. 12, 13)

4 R6 (size AA) battery for Remote

Commander (2) (p. 165)

Serial port adaptor for Memory Stick (1),

PC serial cable (1), AC power adaptor for

Serial port adaptor (1) (p. 117)

DCR-TRV10E only

6 Memory Stick (1) (p. 100)

DCR-TRV10E only

7 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 38, 71)

Shoulder strap (1) (p. 160)

Lens cap (1) (p. 20)

10 21-pin adaptor (1) (p. 39)

Application software: PictureGear 3.2Lite (CD ROM) (1) (p. 117)

DCR-TRV10E only

1 BeçnpoBóHbI pyJbT dNCTaHcNoHHOуnpaBJIeHn (1) (cTp. 164)

RMT-812: DCR-TRV10E

RMT-809: DCR-TRV8E

2 CeTeBoi aIaIeP IepemEnHoro ToKa AC-

L10A/L10B/L10C(1)，npoBOD

3JIeKTpOuNTaHnA (1) (cTp. 13)

3 BaTapeHbIe 6Jok NP-FM50 (1)

(ctp. 12, 13)

4 BaTapeiKa R6 (pa3Mepa AA) dIyIyIbTa

Tonbko moJeB DCR-TRV10E

7 CoeHnHTeHbHbI Ka6eIb ayDnO/BnDeo (1) (ctp. 38, 71)

This chapter introduces you to the basic features of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses "() for more information.

1 Connecting the mains lead (p. 18)

Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 12).

2 Inserting a cassette (p. 19)

Slide OPEN/EJECT in the direction of the arrow and open the lid.

Push the middle portion of the back of the cassette to insert.
3 Close the cassette compartment by pressing the mark on the cassette compartment.

After the cassette compartment going down completely, close the lid until it clicks.

1 Remove the lens cap.
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button.The picture appears on the LCD screen.

4 Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. To stop recording, press START/STOP again.

Slide OPEN in the direction of the mark. Then, open the LCD panel.

Viewfinder

When the LCD panel is closed, use the viewfinder placing your eye against its eyecup.

4

Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD screen (p. 33)

1 Set the POWER switch to

PLAYER while pressing the small green button.

Press to rewind the tape.

REW

Press to start playback.

PLAY

NOTE

Do not pick up your camcorder by holding the viewfinder, the LCD panel or the battery pack.

PykoBoDCTBO IO 6bICTpOmy 3aIpycky

B daHno rIaBe npBedeHbIO cHOBHbIe cyHKcIMn BaSei BIndeokamepbI. PoIOpbHbIe CBeDeHNr npBedeHbI Ha cTpaHnue B KpyrlbIX cKo6KaX "( ).

3 HaxmTe KhoNky 1nHaayana BOCpOn3BeDeHna.

PLAY

ПОНМЕЧАНЕ

He npHIMMaIte BnDeOkaMepy, B3BbWcB 3a BnDOuCKaTeIb nn NaHeIb KKd.

Using this manual

The instructions in this manual are for the two models listed in the table below. Before you start reading this manual and operating your camcorder, check the model number by looking at the bottom of your camcorder. The DCR-TRV10E is the model used for illustration purposes. Otherwise, the model name is indicated in the illustrations. Any differences in operation are clearly indicated in the text, for example, "DCR-TRV10E only."

As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in capital letters.

e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.

When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep sound to indicate that the operation is being carried out.

Types of differences

DCR-	TRV8E	TRV10E
DV synchro-editing	—	●
MEMORY mark* (on the POWER switch)	—	●

Provided

Not provided

• The model with MEMORY marked on the POWER switch is provided with memory functions. See page 100 for details.

Note on Cassette Memory

Your camcorder is based on the DV format. You can only use mini DV cassettes with your camcorder. We recommend you to use a tape with cassette memory [11].

The functions which depend on whether the tape has the cassette memory or not are:

End search (p. 31, 37)
- Searching a recording by date - date search (p. 66)
- Photo search (p. 69).

The functions you can operate only with the cassette memory are:

• Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title - title search (p. 68)
  Superimposing a title (p. 79)
• Making your own titles (p. 83)
• Labeling a cassette (p. 85).

For details, see page 129.

You see this mark in the introduction of the features that operate only with cassette memory.

Tapes with cassette memory are marked by C (Cassette Memory).

IcnoIb3OBAHne daHHoro pyKOBoDCTBa

IHCtpyKcHn B daHHom pyKObOdCTBe
npedHa3HaueHbI dJa DBx MoedeJe,
nepeuCleHbIX B Ta6Piue HHe. IpeeTEm,
kak npOceTb DaHHOe pyKObDToB No HaaTaB
3KcPnyatau BaWei BvdeOkAmeBbl,
npOBepbTe HOMep MoEJI Na HHXNe CTOpOHe
BaWei BvdeOkAmeBbl.B KaYeCTBe
IIJIOCTpaTHbIX cJeIe NcNoJIb3yETcR MoJeB
DCR-TRV10E.B DpyrHu CnyaHx HOpem MoEJIyKa3AHn pucyHKax.KacKe-Jn6o pacXoJxDeHn
B 3KcPnyatau YeTko Yka3aHbI B TeKCTe,
hAnpMeep, "ToJIbKO MoEJI B DCR-TRV10E."
Ppi UTeHm DnHORO pyKObOdCTBa
yUHTbBAaTE, YTO KhoNk U yCTaHOBVn Ha
BvdeOkAmepe NOKa3aHbI 3aJIaHBIMn 6yKBAmn.
Ppim.YcTAHOBITE BbIKIOuateJIb POWER B
noJIoXeHn CAMERA.
Ppi BblONHeHn Opeaun Ha BVdeOkAmepe
BblCMoXeTe ycblMaTb 3yMMepHbI CnHAp,
noITBepKDaOnu BblONHeHne Opeaun.

Tunbi pa3nnyi

DCR-	TRV8E	TRV10E
Синхонnéй мо ntай DV	—	●
3нak MEMORY* (на пеклочатèle POWER)	—	●

Meetc

• OTCyTCTByET

* B MOpEnIx co 3HaKoM MEMORY Ha nepeKnIOuATEne POWER nmeIoTc yHKnCn nnamr. Iopro6bIe cBeDeHn npBVeDeHbHa CTp.100.

PpmeHne no KaccetHO namrTn

BaWb BnDeOkamepa ochoHa Ha foOpMaTe DV. Bbl MoKeTe nCnOlb3ObaT bIra BaWei BnDEOkamepbToJbKO KAcTeBmHn DV. PeKoMeHdyTe cNcOlb3ObaT JeHTy C KAcTeTHOn NaMrtBIO III.

HnHex pnpBdeHb cyHKm, KOTopbIe 3aBcIAT OT TOI, IMeETCAJ HA JIHTe KAcCETHa nAMrTb NNI HET:

ПОИСК KOHA (cTp. 31, 37)
-ПоискЗаинnoдатe -Поискдatabi (ctp.66)
-ΦOTONOικ (cTp.69).

Функши,КOTOpbIMN BblMOKeTe ynpabnTb TOIbKO C NOMOu KACCETHOI nAMrTi, CNeDyUOuHie:

-ПоИСК Граиц 3аписи На Лeнт e no TnTpу -ПоИСК ТИТра (Стр.68)
- HanoXeHne TnTpa (ctp. 79)
- Co3dahne BaIINX CO6CTBHeHbIX TITPOB (cTp. 83)
MapKupOBKa Kaccetbl (ctp. 85).

Iopob6hie CBeHnH npBHeHbHa cTp.129.

BbMOKTeYBnDeTb3TOT 3HaK pN INOcAHNIФHKn, KOTOpBIMN MOXHO ynpaBnTb TOnbKO c NOMoUbIO KAccETHO nAMrTI.

JIeHTbIC KAcCEThOH nAmrTbIO MapKnpyOTcC nOMOuBIO 3HaKa CII (KacCeTHaI NaMaTb).

Note on TV colour systems

TV colour systems differ from country to country. To view your recordings on a TV, you need a PAL system-based TV.

Copyright precautions

Television programmes, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the copyright laws.

Precautions on camcorder care

• The LCD screen and/or the colour viewfinder are manufactured using high-precision technology. However, there may be some tiny black spots and/or bright spots (red, blue or green in colour) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and/or in the colour viewfinder. These spots occur normally in the manufacturing process and do not affect the recorded picture in any way. Effective number of pixels is 99.99% or more.
• Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea water. Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction. Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a].
• Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60^ (140^) , such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b].
• Do not place your camcorder so as to point the viewfinder or the LCD screen toward the sun. The inside of the viewfinder or LCD screen may be damaged [c].

Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not made due to a malfunction of the camcorder, video tape, etc.

Copepkahne 3aIncn He MoKeT 6bITb KOMpeHcnpoBaHO B Cnyae,ecJI N3aINCb IIN BOCpOIN3BeJeHne He BbIOJIHeHb I3-3a HEnCpAxBHOCTN BuDEOKAmepbl,BuDEOEHTbl T.II.

Installing the battery pack

Install the battery pack to use your camcorder outdoors.

(1) Lift up the viewfinder.
(2) Slide the battery pack down until it clicks.

To remove the battery pack

Lift up the viewfinder.

Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing BATT down.

YctaHOBka 6aTapeHoro 6Joka

YctaHOBInTe 6bapeHbI 6JOK IJrTO, YTO6bl NCNoJIb3OBA Tb BaSy BnDeokamepy BHe NOMeueHn.

After installing the battery pack

Do not carry your camcorder by holding the battery pack. If you do so, the battery pack may slide off your camcorder unintentionally, damaging your camcorder.

If you use the large capacity battery pack

If you install the NP-FM70/FM90 battery pack on your camcorder, extend its viewfinder. Take care not to pinch your finger when lifting the viewfinder up and down.

Iocne yctaHOBKn 6aTapeHoro 6Joka

He nepenocnte cboIO BnDeokamepy, B3RBunCb 3a6atapeHbIb 6nOK.EcNt BbTak cdenaeTe, 6baTeHbIb 6nOK moKet HnpOn3BOJbHO COCKoJIb3HytbcBaWeBnDeokamepbIn nobpeDntb ee.

PpHnCnOJIb3OBAHn6aTapeHOro 6Joka 6OJIbUoI EMKOCtN

Pn yctaHOBke 6batapeHoro 6Noka NP-FM70/ FM90 Ha BaUy BUndeokamepy NODHMnTe BUNONCKaTeJIb. ByIbTe OCTOpOxHbI, YTObI He npuSeMeNTb BaU paneu npn NOdHMmaHN n ONyCKaHN BUNONCKaTeJIa.

Charging the battery pack

Use the battery pack after charging it for your camcorder.

Your camcorder operates only with the "InfoLITHIUM" battery pack (M series).

"InfoLITHIUM" is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

(1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder to the DC IN jack with the plug's mark facing up.
(2) Connect the mains lead to the AC power adaptor.
(3) Connect the mains lead to the mains.
(4) Set the POWER switch to OFF. Charging begins. The remaining battery time is indicated in minutes on the display window. When the remaining battery indicator changes to normal charge is completed. To fully charge the battery (full charge), leave the battery pack attached for about 1 hour after normal charge is completed until FULL appears in the display window. Fully charging the battery allows you to use the battery longer than usual.

3apka 6aTapeHoro 6loKa

IcnoIb3yIte 6aTapeHbI bLOK dIra BaSei BnDEOKaMepbl nOce ero 3aprKn. Ba7a BnDEOKaMepa pa60TaET TOnbKO C 6aTapeHbIM 6lOkOM "InfoLITHIUM" (cepN M).

"InfoLITHIUM" Альперся Торов Марков Корпорачи Sony.

(1)OTKpoITe KpbIshky rHe3da DC IN n noDcoeDNHnTE cTeBOJ aanTep nepemEHOro TOka, npInaraembIK BaueB WBeOkAmepe, K rHe3dy DC IN, TaK TTo6bl WTeKeP ▲6bl HnpaBAnEh BBepx.
(2)ПодсоeДинITE npOBOD АЛЕКТрОпТАнИΚ cTeBOMy aДaNTepу nepemeHOrO TOKa.
(3)ПодсоeДинITE npOBOD эЛeКТрОпИТаHЯ K ceteBOI po3eTke.
(4)UcTaHOBInTe nepeKJIOuCaTeNb POWER B noLoXeHne OFF. NaHHeTc3apRJa. B OOKoUke dinCnJIeB 6yIeT OTo6paXaTbCBA BpEMr OCTaBWeOcR 3apRABa MmHyTax. EcIn nHnDKaTOP ocTaBWeOcR 3apRda N3MeHITcRa H,3TO 3NaHT, YTO HOpMaJIbHaN 3apRJa 3aBePseHa.ДЯ NOIHOH 3apRdKn 6bATapeHnOro 6bLOKa (NoHnA 3apRJa) OCTaBtBe 6bATEHnBb6loK npIKpeINeHHbIM Ha MeCTe pNbIIN3ntEhBOHa Ho OINH qac NoCte 3aBepSeHn HOpMaJIbHOI 3apRdKn DoTexnop, POKa B OKoUko DnCpIeNe He NoBNTcN INDkaunr FULL. PoHnAra 3apRdKn 6bATapeHnOro 6bLOKa No3BoJIeT Bam IcNoIb3ObAtb 6bATapeHnBb 6bOk dOnIbe YeM O6bHuO.

Step 1 Preparing the power supply

Note

Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of the AC power adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC power adaptor.

Remaining battery time indicator

The remaining battery time indicator in the display window roughly indicates the recording time.

Until your camcorder calculates the actual remaining battery time

“--min” appears in the display window.

If there is a slight difference in shape between the plug of mains lead and the terminal of AC power adaptor

It is ignorable for their mutual connection and power supply.

Plug the mains lead deeply

Be sure to plug the mains lead deeply into the terminal of AC power adaptor so that it is firmly locked. If there is a gap between the plug of mains lead and the terminal of AC power adaptor, it does not affect the efficiency of the AC power adaptor.

While charging the battery pack, no indicator appears or the indicator flashes in the display window in the following cases

• The battery pack is not installed correctly.
• The AC power adaptor is disconnected.
• Something is wrong with the battery pack.

Approximate number of minutes to charge an empty battery pack

Approximate number of minutes when you use a fully charged battery

Numbers in parentheses () indicate the time using a normally charged battery.

• Approximate continuous recording time at 25^ C( 77^ F) . The battery life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment.
  ** Approximate number of minutes when recording while you repeat recording start/stop, zooming and turning the power on/off. The actual battery life may be shorter.

Pπi6n3nteHbHOe BpemaB MmHytax npnNCNoIb3OBAHmN NOHOCbIO 3apJxKeHHoro 6aTapeHoro 6noka

Yncna BCKo6kax（）yka3bIBaHTBpEm npnNCNoIb3OBAHm 6aTapeiHoro 6Ioka C HopMaIbHOJ 3apJIKoJ.

* Pn6Ibn3ntelbHoe Bpemr HnpepebIBHO 3aIncn npn TemnepaType 25^ (77^) .Pnp NcIOJIb3OBaHNBnBNeOkaMepbI B XoIoNDbIX ycIOBnX cpoK cnJx6bl 6aTapeiHorO 6Ioka 6ydet Kopoye.
**Pn6Bn3nteIbHoe BpeM B MInHyTaX npi 3aIncn C HeoJHOKpaTHbIM NyCKOM/ OCTaHOBKO 3aIncn, Hae3dOM BnDeOkampebl N BKJIIOHeHem/BbIKJIIOHeHem PNTaHn. PaKTtueckn cPoK cnyk6bl 3apJa 6aTapeHOrO 6lOKa MoKet 6bTb KopoYe.

Playing time/BpemBocnpon3Beeden

DCR-TRV8E

Battery pack/БатAPEйньий 6лok	Playing time on LCD screen/B越来越大 BOCPON3BVEDEHINHA зкра themselves	Playing time with LCD closed/B越来越大 BOCPON3BVEDEHINApri зakрытом XXKД
NP-FM50 (supplied)/ (прILAЯТСА)	140 (125)	180 (160)
NP-FM70	295 (265)	370 (330)
NP-FM90	450 (400)	560 (505)

DCR-TRV10E

Battery pack/Батуарейный城乡居民	Playing time on LCD screen/B越来越大 B越来越大	Playing time with LCD closed/B越来越大 B越来越大
	Вразуwoхш�д и захше XXД	Протяларетсу пгларытOM XXД
NP-FM50 (supplied)/ (прилараяец)	135 (120)	180 (160)
NP-FM70	285 (255)	370 (330)
NP-FM90	435 (390)	560 (505)

Approximate number of minutes when you use a fully charged battery

Numbers in parentheses " ( ) " indicate the time using a normally charged battery. The battery life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment.

PnIbI3ntJIbHOe BpemB MmHyTax PnINcNoJIb3OBAHIM NIOHOCtBu 3apJxHeHHOro 6aTapeHoro 6noka

LcΦpB B cKo6kax (“) yKa3bIbAOT BpeM npi nCNoIb3OBAHn 6aTapeHOrO 6JOKa C HopMaJIbHOH 3apHKnO. Ppi nCNoIb3OBAHn BnDeOkamepbB XoJIoNbHbIX ycIOBnX CpOK cnJyK6bI 6aTapeHOrO 6JOKa 6yDet KOpOe.

After charging the battery pack Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.

Note on the remaining battery time indicator during recording

The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are recording. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about 1 minute for the correct remaining battery time to be displayed.

What is "InfoLITHIUM"?

The "InfoLITHIUM" is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange data such as battery consumption with compatible video equipment.

This unit is compatible with the "InfoLITHIUM" battery pack (M series). Your camcorder operates only with the "InfoLITHIUM" battery.

"InfoLITHIUM" M series battery packs have the InfoLITHIUM mark.

"InfoLITHIUM" is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

IocJe 3apRKn 6aTapeHoro 6noka OToeHNHe cTeBoi aanTpep nepMeHHoro ToKa ot rHe3da DC IN ha Bauei Bndeokamepe.

Connecting to the mains

When you use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from the mains using the AC power adaptor.

(1) Open the DC IN jack cover, pulling the cover out a little and rotating it. Connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack on your camcorder with the plug's mark facing up.
(2) Connect the mains lead to the AC power adaptor.
(3) Connect the mains lead to the mains.

The mains lead must only be changed at a qualified service shop.

PRECAUTION

The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (the mains) as long as it is connected to the mains, even if the set itself has been turned off.

Notes

• The AC power adaptor can supply power even if the battery pack is attached to your camcorder.
• The DC IN jack has "source priority". This means that the battery pack cannot supply any power if the mains lead is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the mains lead is not plugged into the mains.
• Keep the AC power adaptor away from your camcorder if the picture is disturbed.

Using a car battery

Use Sony DC Adaptor/Charger (not supplied).

BHIMAHNE

Повобд ЗЕКТРОПАТИЗ CLEДУЕТ 3aMEHЯТБ TOЛБКВ МбтэрсКОй KBALINФИЦЮРБАнНΟΥ OБслжИВИАНО.

IPEIOCTEPEXEHNE

Annapata He OTKIIOUaTeC T O NCTOuHnKa nepemEHORo TOKA Do TEX NOp, NOKa OH NOCDoeMHN K 3JIeKTPnuecckOn cETN, DaJce ECnn CAM annapaT N BbIKJUoyeH.

PpimueaHn

-Питане OT cTeBOrO aanTepa nepemehHoro ToKa mokTe nOabatbCn daxe Bcnyae,ecn6batapeHnb 6Iok npKpEnnE K BaSei BvdeOkamepe.
- Πhe3do DC IN IMeET "PnOpntET nCToYnka". 3To 3NaHT, YTO nITaHne OT bTaapeHORO 6boka He MOKeT NOdaBaTcBc, eCIN nPoBOd 3NeKtpONNTAHN IOCDoeHNHe K rHe3dy DC IN, dAxe cEIN pOBoD 3NeKtpONNTAHN H nePODcoeHNHe K CTeBOH POeTke.
Eeinn3o6paXeHne nCKaXeHc,OTOdBnHbTe CTeBcOy aanTp nepemEnHOrO ToKa NoaIbSe ONTBeOKaMepb.

UcnoJb3ObaHne aBTOMo6nJbHOro aKKyMylrTopa

IcnoIb3yIte aIaITeP/3apIHoe yCTpoIcTBO nocToHHoro ToKa Sony (he npunaraetca).

Step 2 Inserting a cassette

(1) Slide OPEN/EJECT in the direction of the arrow and open the lid. The cassette compartment automatically lifts up and opens.
(2)Push the middle portion of the back of the cassette to insert. Insert the cassette in a straight line deeply into the cassette compartment with the window facing out.
(3) Close the cassette compartment by pressing the PUSH mark on the cassette compartment. The cassette compartment automatically goes down.
(4) After the cassette compartment going down completely, close the lid until it clicks.

Пун=kT2 YctaHOBKa KaCCetbl

(1)ПepeДиНьт epeKIOUaTeIb OPEN/ EJECT B HappaBJIeHm CTpeJIkn. KacceTHbI OTcEK aBTOMaTHyeCKn POnHIMeTCa BBepx n OTkpoETcR.
(2)HaxmTe nocpeDnHe 3aDHei CTOpOHbI KaccTeB, YTObI BCTaBtB ee. BcTaBbTe Kaccety no npMOn B KaccTeHbI OTcEk Do yNopa, TaK YTObI OKOuKy 6blO obpaueHo hapyKy.
(3)3aKpOte KaccetHbI OTCeK, HaxkAB MeTKy PUSH HaOTcKe. KaccetHbI OTcKe aBTOMaTnHeCKn ONyCTNTcB Hn3.
(4)Посл.TORO,КakKacceTHbОТсЕК onyctntcra ПОЛHOCtBIO BHN3,ЗakpoTKe KpbIshky TaK,чTOбla OHa 3auneKnHynacb.

1

2,3

4

To eject a cassette

Follow the procedure above and in step 2, take out the cassette.

Notes

• Do not press the cassette compartment down. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• The cassette compartment may not be closed when you press any part of the lid other than the PUSH mark.

When you use mini DV cassette with cassette memory

Read the instruction about cassette memory to use this function properly (p. 129).

To prevent misoperation of your camcorder Set the POWER switch to OFF when you insert and eject a cassette.

To prevent accidental erasure

Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to expose the red mark.

IIN3BLeueHnKaCCeTbI

BbIIOJIHnTE npINBeENHyIO BblSe npOeDpy B nyHKTe 2, BblbTe Kaccety.

PpIMeuaHnA

• He haxkmaite BnH3 kaccetbIOTcEK. 3To MoKET npBecTN K HEnCnpaBHOCTN.
  KaccTeHbIOTcEKMOKeTHe3aKpbITbC8eCNBbHaXMeTeKaKyIO-Ni6oDpyrYIOuactbHaKpbIiKe,aHEMeTKyPUSH.

PnncnoB3OBAHmKaccTeblMHN DV C KaccTeHOI NaMTbIO

Your camcorder automatically focuses for you.

(1) Remove the lens cap by pressing both knobs on its sides and attach the lens cap to the grip strap.
(2) Install the power source and insert a cassette. See "Step 1" and "Step 2" for more information (p. 12 to p. 19).
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button. Your camcorder is set to the standby mode.
(4) Slide OPEN in the direction of the mark. Then, open the LCD panel. The viewfinder automatically turns off.
(5) Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The "REC" indicator appears. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your camcorder lights up. To stop recording, press START/STOP again.

3a\Pncb n3o6paXeHnA

BaSha BnDeOkamepa aBTOMaTHeCKN BbINOJIHReT fokcnpOBky 3a Bac.

(1)CHIMNEKpbIuKyObeKTnBa，HaxabObe KhoIKnHa ee KpOMKe，NpiKpEnTe KpbIuKyObeKTnBaKpeMHIOДЯ3axBaTa.
(2)YCTaHOBInTe NCTOCHNK IITaHIN IN BCTaBBte KACCEty. IOpIObHbIe CBeDeHNr PnIBeHeHbI B“PnyKHTe 1”N“PnyHKTe 2" (Ctp.12-19).
(3)Haxab MaIeHbKyIO 3eIeHyIO KHOINky, yCTaHOBInTe nepeKNIouaTeInb POWER B nOLOXeHne CAMERA. BaIa BnDeoKaMepa 6yDet yCTaHOBJIeHa B peJIM OxUdAHNIA.
(4)Передвиные КНОКУ OPEN B HanpaВлЕн И MeTKN 3aTeM OТКpoIte NaHEnb XXKД. BИДОССКATERNBblKIIHOHTCа ABTOMaTnueeCKN.
(5)Haxmnte KhoNky START/STOP.Bawa BnDeOkamepa NaHcT 3aInCb. IoBvITc HnDnKaTOp "REC". BbICBeTITc TaKke lamNoUka 3aInCn, paCnoIooKeHHa Ha nepeDne nAHei N BuDeOkamepbl.ДЯ ocTaHOBKn 3aInCn HaxmTe KhoNky START/ STOP eue pa3. B BnDoINckaTele BbICBeTITc NaMNoUka 3aInCn.

Note

Fasten the grip strap firmly. Do not touch the built-in microphone during recording.

Note on Recording mode

Your camcorder records and plays back in the SP (standard play) mode and in the LP (long play) mode. Select SP or LP in the MENU settings. In the LP mode, you can record 1.5 times as long as in the SP mode.

When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing the tape on your camcorder.

Note on the lock (DCR-TRV10E only)

When you slide the lock to the right, the POWER switch can no longer be set to MEMORY accidentally. The lock is set to the left before your camcorder leaves the factory.

To enable smooth transition

Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder. When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF. When you use a tape with cassette memory, however, you can make the transition smooth even after ejecting the cassette if you use the END SEARCH function (p. 31).

If you leave your camcorder in the standby mode for 5 minutes while the cassette is inserted

Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to save battery power and to prevent battery and tape wear. To resume the standby mode, set the POWER switch to OFF, and to CAMERA again.

When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in the LP mode

The playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly between scenes.

PpIMeuaHnA

ПлOTH npICTeRHTe peMeHbДЯ 3axBaTa BnDEOKaMepbl. He pIrkacaiTecb K BCTPOEHOMy MKNpOFOHy BO BpeM 3annci.

PpmeaHne no pexmy 3aHncn

Baawa BnndeKaMepa BbINOJHReT 3aNcB IN BOCpOIN3BeDeHne B pexmme SP (CTaHdapTHoe BOCpOIN3BeDeHne) IN B pexmme LP (DIOIOnrpaOoUee BOCpOIN3BeDeHne). Bb6epnte KOMaHdy SP nLI NP LBy cTaHOBkax MENU. B pexmme LP Bbl MoKeTe BbINOJIHrTB 3aNcB 1,5 pa3a DOnJIbSe IIOBpeMeHN, Yem B pexmme SP. Ppi BbINOJIHEnHn 3aNcN ha JIHTy B pexmme LP Ha BaWei BnDEOkamepe peKOMeHdyETcB OBCpOIN3BOJInT bTy JIHTy TaXke Ha BaWei BnDEOkampe.

Adjusting the LCD screen

To adjust the brightness of the LCD screen, press either of the two buttons on LCD BRIGHT. The LCD panel moves about 90 degrees to the viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to the lens side.

If you turn the LCD panel over so that it faces the other way, the indicator appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD screen (Mirror mode).

PerynipoBka 3KpaHa KKД

Дярergyнорвк npKoctn 3kaHa JKKJ
HaxMMTE Ody IN KhoNOK Ha LCD BRIGHT.
Пань JKKД мokET pepeBnIraTcЯпIMepHO
Ha 90 rpaIycOB B cTOpOHy BIDOMckATEY I
npMepHOHa 180 rpaIycOB B cTOpOHy obEketna.
EcIn BlNoBepHete NaHJIb XKKd TAK, YTO
6ydet HanpabIeHa B dpyrIy cToPOHy, B
BIDONCKaTeJe N Ha 3KpaHe JXKD NOBHTC
INHdkaTop (3epKaIbHbI pexm).

When closing the LCD panel, set it vertically until it clicks, and swing it into the camcorder body.

Note

When using the LCD screen except in the mirror mode, the viewfinder automatically turns off.

When you use the LCD screen outdoors in direct sunlight

The LCD screen may be difficult to see. If this happens, we recommend that you use the viewfinder.

LCD screen backlight

You can change the brightness of the backlight.

Select LCD B.L. in the MENU settings.

Even if you adjust the LCD screen backlight or brightness of the LCD screen

The recorded picture will not be affected.

Picture in the mirror mode

The picture on the LCD is a mirror-image.

However, the picture will be normal when recorded.

During recording in the mirror mode

ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote

Commander does not work.

Indicators in the mirror mode

The STBY indicator appears as 11 and REC as

• Some of the other indicators appear mirror-reversed and others are not displayed.

After recording

(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF.
(2) Close the LCD panel.
(3) Eject the cassette.

To record pictures with the viewfinder - adjusting the viewfinder

If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder. Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the indicators in the viewfinder come into sharp focus.

Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder lens adjustment lever.

Using the zoom feature

Move the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Move it further for a faster zoom.

Using the zoom function sparingly results in better-looking recordings.

"T" side: for telephoto (subject appears closer)

"W" side: for wide-angle (subject appears farther away)

Zoom greater than 10× is performed digitally, if you set D ZOOM to ON in the MENU settings. The digital zoom function is set to OFF at the factory. (p. 87)

The right side of the bar shows the digital zooming zone.

When you shoot close to a subject

If you cannot get a sharp focus, move the power zoom lever to the "W" side until the focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80~cm (about 2 feet 5/8 inch) away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1cm (about 1 / 2 inch) away in the wide-angle position.

Notes on digital zoom

• Digital zoom starts to function when zoom exceeds 10 × .
• The picture quality deteriorates as you go toward the "T" side. Set D ZOOM to OFF in the MENU settings. Otherwise the digital zoom activates without notice (p. 87).

IcnoJIb3OBAHneФyHKcHn Hae3da BnDEOKaMepbl

IpeeBnHbTe pbuHr npuBOdHoro

Bapnoo6bekTbBa CnErgKa DnIg OTHOCHTeJIbHO MeDIIeHHOro Hae3Da BnDEOKaMepbl.

IpeeBnHbTe ero CnilbHee dIa yckOpEHnOr Hae3da BnDeOkamepbl.

UcnoJb3OBAHne yHKnUHae3Da BuDeOkamepBb B He6oJbIOM KOJIeCTBe oBeceNeuBaet HauNHyUe pe3YNbTaTbI.

CTopoha "T":ДЯ TelepeToO (ObbeKT np6JInxKaetcra

CTopoha "W":ДлЯшпорokoyroЛьногоВида (объekt ydaJIЯTeCЯ)

Hae3d BnDeokamepb60nee 10x BbIOnHReTcnaPpOBbIM MeToDom,ecnBbYcTaHOBnTeKOMaHyD ZOOM B nIoJoxHeNe ON B yCTaHOBkAXMENU.Ha npEanPnTm-N3rOToBnTeIe FyHKuNzIcFpOBBo TpaHcCfoKaUm yCTaHOBJIeHa BnIoJoxHe N OFF (ctp.87).

Pn cbeMe oBeKta c 6JIn3KOro noLoXeHn

EcIn BbI He moXeTe nOlyuHTb YetKoI ΦOKyCINOBKN, nepeBnHbTe pBuar nPnBOHORO BApNoOOBJekTnBA CTOpOHY W" Do nOlyuHEN YeKToB φOKycnOBKn. BbI MoXeTe BByIOONHrTb CbEMky O6BekTA B N0LOKeHN TEleFOTO, KOTobpIOTcNOT NO kpaIHe MpeHa paCtOHN 80 cm OT nobEpxHOCTNs obKeTnBa IIN Jx Ke OKO1 1 CM B nOLOKeHN mIpOKoYOrJbHO BnDA.

: Recording starts when you press START/ STOP, and stops when you press it again (factory setting).

ANTI GROUND SHOOTING Your camcorder records only while you press START/STOP. Use this mode to avoid recording unnecessary scenes.

5SEC: When you press use this mode to START/ STOP, your camcorder records for 5 seconds and then stops automatically.

YcTaHOBka START/STOP MODE

:ПинжатиКнОКИ START/STOP NaHHeTc8 3aNc6b,a npi noBToPHom Haxatm 3TOI KHOKN 3aNc6b OCTaHOBITc8 (3aBOJCKa YCTaHOBka).

ANTI GROUND SHOOTING Baisha Bndeokamepa 6ydtBbINOJIHrTb 3aINc bToJbKO npi HaxKaTIH KHOJKN START/STOP. IVcNoJIb3yIte 3OT pexIM dIra n36eXaHnI 3aIncN HeXeJaTeJbHbIX 3NI3OIOB.

5SEC: EcJn Bbl haKmTe KhoNky START/ STOP, BnIeokamepa 6yIET BblonHrTb 3aINcB TeHeHne 5 CeKyHd, a 3aTEM aBTOMaTHueCKn OCTaHOBNTcR.

Notes

• You cannot use the fader function in the 5SEC or mode.
• The time code does not appear in the 5SEC mode.

To extend the recording time in the 5SEC mode

Five dots ( ) appear, and then disappear at a rate of one per second. To extend the recording time, press START/STOP again before all the dots disappear. Recording continues for about 5 seconds from the moment you press START/STOP.

PpIMeuaHn

• BbI He MoXeTe IcNoJIb3OBA Tb cyHKuIO 1peiepaB pexKmE 5SEC nIIN peKmE
  BpeKIMe 5SEC chetnK JIeHTbI He IORBJIeTcI.

Indicators displayed in the recording mode

The indicators are not recorded on tape.

The time code indicates the recording or playback time, "0:00:00" (hours : minutes : seconds) in CAMERA mode and "0:00:00:00" (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in PLAYER mode. You cannot rewrite only the time code.

Remaining tape indicator

The indicator may not be displayed accurately depending on the tape.

KoB BpeMeHn

KoI BpeMeHn yka3bIbaeT BpeM 3aInc nIIN Bocnpou3BeDeHnra,“0:00:00”（yacbl，MNHyTbI, cekyHdbI）BpeXIMe CAMERA n“0:00:00" （yacbl，MNHyTbI，cekyHdbI：KaIpbI）BpeXIMe PLAYER.Bbl He MoxKeTe nepe3aIncatb ToIbKO KoI BpeMeHn.

HnDKaTOpOCTaBWeCnJeHTbI

INHnKaTOp MoKcTe TOnHO He OTo6paXaTbCBA3aBnCmOCTN OTJeHTbl.

Shooting backlit subjects (BACK LIGHT)

When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a light background, use the backlight function.

Press BACK LIGHT in the recording or standby mode.

The indicator appears in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen.

To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again.

CbeMa o6BeKToB c 3aHnei noCBeTkoi (BACK LIGHT)

EcIn BbBbIOJIHReTe CbEMKy o6BeKTa c nCTOHHKOM CBeTA N03aI IN Hero IIN JKe o6BeKTA CO CBETNbIM fOHOM, IcNoIb3yIte fYHKUIO 3aDHe NIOCBETKN.

Haxmte KhoNky BACK LIGHT B peXnme 3aIncn nnpeXnme oKnDaHn.

B BnDOnCKaTeIe IIn Ha 3KpaHe KKД nOraBtcaHnDnKaTOp

Дя OTmeны НжмITE KhoIGNky BACK LIGHT eue pa3.

BACK LIGHT

If you press EXPOSURE when shooting backlit subjects

The backlight function will be canceled.

EcIn Bbl HaxMeTe KhoNky EXPOSURE npBbIOnJIHeHm CbeMkn OBeKToB c 3aDHeNoDCBETKoI

ФункцяЗаднй посветкбудETOTMeHeHa.

Shooting in the dark (NightShot)

The NightShot function enables you to shoot a subject in a dark place. For example, you can satisfactorily record the environment of nocturnal animals for observation when you use this function.

(1) While your camcorder is in the standby mode, slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.
(2) Press START/STOP to start recording. and "NIGHTSHOT" indicators flash on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. To cancel the NightShot function, slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.

Cbemka B TEMHOTE (Houhna cbemka)

Функци_Hочнoi CьeMkn no3BOLЯТБam BbIIOJIHЯТсьсeMky OобЕКТОВ B Temhblx MecTax. Hanpimep, BblcmoKTe CycNEXomBbIOJIHЯТсьeMky HOUHbIX XINBOTbДЯ Na6JIHOdEHHI npn IcNoJIb3OBAHN DaHHOJФункци.

(1)BTOBpEMKoTgdaBUNDeOkaMepaHaxoDITcBpeXIMeOxNDAHn,nepeDBINbTe nepeKIOUpaTeIb NIGHTSHOT BnoIOxKeHne ON.
(2)HaKMTe KhoNky START/STOP nIa haJa 3aInci.

Инданахрьи "NIGHTSHOT" HaunhyT MngarbHa 3Kpahe XXKD nIN B BINOINCKaTeIe.ДЯ OTMeHbФyHKuIN NocHoH CbEMKn NepeBnHbTe nepeKJIIOUaTeIb NIGHTSHOT B noLoXeHN OFF.

Using ^+ SLOW SHTR

The NightShot +Slow shutter mode makes subjects more than four times brighter than those recorded in the NightShot mode.

(1) Slide NIGHTSHOT to ON in the standby or recording mode. indicator appears.
(2) Press +SLOW SHTR until the desired NIGHTSHOT indicator flashes.

The indicator changes as follows:

(NIGHTSHOT) 1 (NIGHTSHOT1)
2 (NIGHTSHOT2) (NIGHTSHOT)

To cancel the NightShot +Slow shutter mode, slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.

Using the NightShot Light

The picture will be clearer with the NightShot Light on. To enable NightShot Light, set N.S.LIGHT to ON in the MENU settings (p. 87).

IcnoJIb3OBAHne pexIma ^+ SLOW SHTR

PexkIM HcHNO CbEMKn +MeIeHHoro 3aTbopa no3BONJIET CdJIaTb OBeKbTI bOJee Yem B ueTbIpe pa3a IApYe, Yem B cIyueae, ecNI Bbl 6yIeTe BbIIOJIHNb TcEMky B TEMHOte c NMOUBO fYHKUNn HOHNO CbEMKn.

(1)ПepeДинБтЕпeрклуатель NIGHTSHOT B poloxhenue ONВ ржIMе OxuДаня Ип ржIMe 3aIncn. ПОВИТсЯнДИКATOP .
(2)HaximMaIte KhoNky +SLOW SHTR do Tex nop, noka He haNuHT MraTaB HxKhbln HndIkAToP NIGHTSHOT.

INHdkatop6ydtN3MeHrTbCnEduOuIM 06pa30M:

(NIGHTSHOT) (NIGHTSHOT1) (NIGHTSHOT2) (NIGHTSHOT)

Длг OTмны ржима HOчнов CBemkn +MeДлгEHORO 3aTbopa NepeДиньTeперклочаел NIGHTSHOT B noLoхене OFF.

IcnoJb3OBAHne IoDCBETKn DnA HOUHOI CbEMKn

• Do not use the NightShot function in bright places (ex. outdoors in the daytime). This may cause your camcorder to malfunction.
• When you keep NIGHTSHOT set to ON in normal recording, the picture may be recorded in incorrect or unnatural colours.
• If focusing is difficult with the autofocus mode when using the NightShot function, focus manually.

While using the NightShot function, you cannot use the following functions:

• Exposure

• PROGRAM AE
  -White balance
  -Fader*
  -Digital effect*

• You cannot use these functions only in the NightShot +Slow shutter mode.

Shutter speed in the NightShot +Slow shutter mode

Indicator	Shutter speed
1 (NIGHTSHOT1)	1/12
2 (NIGHTSHOT2)	1/3

The +SLOW SHTR button does not work:

• while the fader function is set or in use
• while the digital effect function is in use
• when NIGHTSHOT is set to OFF
• in the MEMORY mode (DCR-TRV10E only)

NightShot Light

NightShot Light rays are infrared and so are invisible. The maximum shooting distance using the NightShot Light is about 3m (10 feet). The shooting distance will be twice or more in the NightShot +Slow shutter mode.

Приимechanicals

He nCnoJIb3yIte cyHKUIO HOcHOr CbEMKn BApKnx MeCTax (HaNPIMep, Ha yNlCe B DHeBHOeBpeM). 3TO MOKeT pINBecTn K HeNCpabHocTn BaWe BNDeOKaMepbl.
-Пи удержани установки NIGHTSHOTВ положени ON пи Нормальон 3аписи зображени может 6ыт 3апсано В Нелразиьньх Или HeeCTeCTBeHHbIX CBetax.
- EcnnФokycnpoBka 3aTpydHeHa B aBTOMaTHueCKOM pexKmpe INCNOJIb3OBaHIN cyHKcIMN HCHOH CbEMKN, BblIOJIHInTe φokycnpOBky BpyHyIO.

PnncnoIb3OBAHnnyHKcnn HocHoN CbeMkn Bbl He moKeTe nCnoJIb3OBaTb cJeDyUoJne yHKn:

-3Kcno3nua
-PROGRAM AE
-Бааннсбелю
-Φeɪnεp
-LuΦpOBoN 3ΦΦeKt
BbI He MoXeTe IcNoJIb3OBAr 3TN ΦyHKcIM TOnbKO B pexKmE HOHOr CbeMKn +MeDJIeHHoro 3aTbopa.

CkopocTb 3aTbopa B pexmHe HooHcBemKu +MeIeHHoro 3aTbopa

Индikatop	Сkopocь 3аТвора
1 (NIGHTSHOT1)	1/12
2 (NIGHTSHOT2)	1/3

Khonka +SLOW SHTR He pa60taeT:

-eCnI yCTaHOBNeHa nIIN IcNoJIb3YeTcH φyHKUgΦeɪdepa
-eCINI NCIOJIb3yETcH cyHKUa IuΦpOBOrO 3ΦΦeKtA
-ecnnepekekIIOUaTeIb NIGHTSHOT yCTaHOBnEH B nOJoxHeNe OFF
-B pexkme MEMORY (ToIbko moJeB DCRTRV10E)

Iopcbetka dna HOHOn CbeMkn

JyHnIOcBETKn IJIa HOuHOcBEmKn AIBIOTc HnOpaKpaChbIMN INoTOMy HeBUNMbIMN. MakcmaJIbHOe paCCToAHHe dJIa CbEMKn pIn NCNoJIb3OBAHmN IOCDBeTKn IJIa HOuHOcBEmKn paBHO npImepHo 3 M. BpeXmme HOUHO cynepcBEmKn +MeDJIeHHoro 3aTBopa paCCToAHHe dJIa CbEMKn 6yDet B Dba INI 60Jee pa3 60JIbSe.

Self-timer recording

You can make a recording with the self-timer. This mode is useful when you want to record yourself.

(1) Press SELFTIMER in the standby mode. The (self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
(2) Press START/STOP. Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep sound. In the last two seconds of the countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then recording starts automatically.

3aInc b no TaMepy camo3anycka

BbMOxTe BbINOJIHHTb 3aINCb NO TaIMepy camo3anycka.

3TOT pexkIM ABLAETCn POJIe3HbIM B TOM Cnyae, ecIn Bbl XOTNTe BblONHITb 3aNNc b camoro ce6ra.

(1) HaxmTe KhoIky SELFTIMER B peXmE OxndaHn. Ha 3kpaHe XKД nIiB BUNOINCKaTeIe NOBNTcR INHdNKaTOP (Taimep camo3anycka).
(2) Haxmnte kHonky START/STOP. TaMep camo3anycka haHHeT o6paTHbI OTCuET ot 10c 3yMMephBIM cHraJOM. B NocleHne DBe cekyHdbI o6paTHoro oTCuTea 3yMMepHbI CnHaN 6yJeT 3ByuTa b YaSe, a 3aTEM aBTomatUHeCKn HaHHeTc 3aINCb.

To stop the self-timer during recording

Press START/STOP.

Use the Remote Commander for convenience.

To record still pictures using the self-timer

Press PHOTO in step 2.

To cancel self-timer recording

Press SELFTIMER so that the indicator disappears from the LCD or viewfinder screen while your camcorder is in the standby mode.

Note

The self-timer recording mode is automatically cancelled when
- Self-timer recording is finished.
- The POWER switch is set to OFF or PLAYER.

Checking the recording

• END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec Review

You can use these buttons to check the recorded picture or shoot so that the transition between the last recorded scene and the next scene you record is smooth.

Поберka 3апссn

• END SEARCH/EDITSEARCH/

Ppocmotp 3annc

BbMOKeTe NcNOJIb3OBAbT 3TN KHOKN JnI npOBepKu 3aINcaHNOrO N3o6paXeHn IIN CbEMKn, TAK YTO6bI nepExoM MekDy NocJeDNHM 3aINcaHHbIM 3NIn3Odom N CNeDuOUIM 3aINCbIBaEBbIM 3NIn3Odom 6blI PJIaBHbIM.

END SEARCH

You can go to the end of the recorded section after you record.

Press END SEARCH in the standby mode. The last 5 seconds of the recorded section are played back and playback stops. You can monitor the sound from the speaker or headphones.

EDITSEARCH

You can search for the next recording start point.

Hold down the + / - side of EDITSEARCH in the standby mode. The recorded section is played back.

• :to go forward
• : to go backward

Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/STOP, re-recording begins from the point you released EDITSEARCH. You cannot monitor the sound.

END SEARCH

BbMOxKTe DoITn DO KOHcA 3aNcAHHOuCTn JeHTbIOcNe BbINONHeHr 3aNcN.

HaxmTe KhoNky END SEARCH B peKmE OxuDAnH. ByUyt BocpnOn3BeDeHbI NocJeDHe 5 cekyHd 3aIncaHHo YacTn, n BOCpOn3BeDeHne OctaHOBHTcR. Bbl MoKeTe KOHTpOJIropOBaTb 3Byk Yepe3 aKyCTNuCeKYIO CNTeMy IIN rJOLOBHble TeNefoHbl.

EDITSEARCH

BbMOKeTe BbIIOJIHrTb NOnCK MeCTa HaHaJa cNeDuOSeI 3aIncn.

Дерхи te haxkaToI CTOpOHy +/- KHONKN EDITSEARCH B pexmE oXnlaHna. Bydet BOCpOn3BeDeHa 3aIncaHna YacTb.

+：ДлгпpoДиЖеньнepeД
-ДЯ npOДВИЖЕн Ha3aД

OTnyCTnTE KhoNky EDITSEARCH nIra octaHObKN BocnpOn3BeDeHn. EcIn Bbl haxMeTe KhoNky START/STOP, hauHeTcna nepe3anncb c TOro MeCt a, rDe Bbl OTnyCTnNI KhoNky EDITSEARCH. Bbl He MoXeTe KOHTpOJIuPoBaTb 3ByK.

Checking the recording - END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec Review

Rec Review

You can check the last recorded section.

Press the - side of EDITSEARCH momentarily in the standby mode.

The last few seconds of the recorded section are played back. You can monitor the sound from the speaker or headphones.

End search function

When you use a tape without cassette memory, the end search function does not work once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape. If you use a tape with cassette memory, the end search function works even once you eject the cassette.

If there is a blank portion in the recorded portion, the end search function may not work correctly. (p. 129)

You can monitor the playback picture on the LCD screen. If you close the LCD panel, you can monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can control playback using the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.
(1) Install the power source and insert the recorded tape.
(2) Set the POWER switch to PLAYER while pressing the small green button. The video control buttons light up.
(3) Slide OPEN. Then, open the LCD panel.
(4) Press to rewind the tape.
(5) Press to start playback.
(6) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME. The speaker on your camcorder is silent when the LCD panel is closed.

Bocnpon3BeDeHne JeHTbI

BbMOXeTe KOHtPOINPOBaTb BOCpON3BOJIMOe
IO60paXeHne Ha 3KpaHe KKd. Ecnn Bb 3aKpoTe
NaHEnb KJKD, Bb CMoXeTe KOHtPOINPOBaTb
BOcPON3BOJIMOE IO60paXeHne B BuONCKaTeNe.
BbMOxTe KOHtPOINPOBaTb BOCpON3BEdHeMe C
nOMoIbIO NylTa DnCTAHIOHOrO ynpabLeHnra,
pnInaraeMoro K Bauei BnuDeokamepe.

(1) YCTAHOBITE NCTOHHK NITAHNAI BCTABBTe 3ANICAHYIO JENTHY.
(2) Haxkab MaIeHbkyo 3eJeHyo KhoNky, yCTAHOBITE nepeKJIouaTeB POWER B nIoJoxHe ME PLAYER. POrBnTcR INDkaCuaH KHONoK ynpaBHeHn BUDeOu3o6paXeHMeM.
(3)пгелдьиьткноку OPEN.Затem OTКроштЯненжКД.
Hakmte KONKy dny yckopHHoN nepemotkn JeHTbI HAZd.
(5) HaxmITE KONKY DnB BKJIOUeHnBOCPON3BeDEHn.
(6)Длгэрелровки رомковши Нжима调解 OнHy n3 DByx KhoNOK VOLUME. Ecnn NaHelen JXKД на Вашеви Вideokampe ZeKpbIta, ДИнамк He BydET pa607aTb.

To stop playback

Press ■.

When monitoring on the LCD screen

You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the LCD screen facing out.

Дя OCTaHOBKIN BOCPON3BeDEHNA

HaxmTe KhoIky

BoBpemKoHTpoHa3KpaHeKKD

BbMOKeTe NOBepHyTb NaHEnb ynpaBHeHn I npDBeHNyTb ee 6oPaTHO Ha MeCTo K KopnyCy BInDeOkamebpI, TaK UTo 3kpan KKd 6ydt ObpaueH HApYk.

To display the screen indicators - Display function

Press DISPLAY on your camcorder or the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.

The indicators appear on the LCD screen.

To make the indicators disappear, press

DISPLAY again.

Your camcorder automatically records not only images on the tape but also the recording data (date/time or various settings when recorded)

(Data code). Data code is not displayed during recording. You can only operate with the Remote Commander.

Press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander in the playback mode.

The display changes as follows:

date/time various settings (SteadyShot, white balance, gain, shutter speed, aperture value) no indicator

Not to display various settings

Set DATA CODE to DATE in the MENU settings (p. 87).

The display changes as follows:

date/time no indicator

IcnoJb3OBaHne cyHKcN KoJa DaTbI

BaSha Bndeokamepa aBTOMatNueckn

3aINcIbAeT He TOnbKO I3O6paXeHnHa JIeHTy, HO TaKKe I DaHNbIe 3aINcN (DaTy/BpeM INI pa3HbIe yCTaHOBKn PnI 3aINcN) (KoD dAtbl).

KoI daTbI He OTo6paKaaETcB BO BpeM 3aHmCn.

BbMOKeTe NcNoIb3ObA Tb 3Tу fYHKUHToJIbKO C NOMOUsIO NyIbTa DnCTaHnOHHO ynpabLeHn.

Haxmte KhONky DATA CODE Ha nyIbTe DnCTaHUNOHOrO ynpabLeHnB pexIme BOCpOn3BeDeHnA.

INDnkaun6yJeT n3MeHrTaCnEduoUIM 06pa3om:

daTa/Bpem → pa3HbIe yCTaHOBKN (yCTOmYnBaJ CbEmKa, 6aJIaHC 6eIOrO, yCINJIeHne, cKOpocTb 3aTBopa, BELNCHHa dnaΦpaarmbl) → 6e3 INHdNKaUH

AUTO 50 AWB F1.7 9db

ДЯТOrO,ЧTO6bI He OTO6paKaJINc b pa3JIuHbIe YCTaHOBKn

YcTaHOBnTe KOMaHny DATA CODE B noIoxKeHne DATE B yCtHaOBkax MENU (ctp. 87).

INDnkaa 6yTeT n3MeHrTbCnEduOuM 06pa3oM:

JaTa/BpeMa 6e3 INHnIkaCmN

Note

The pictures taken on the Memory Stick are not recorded with various settings.

Recording data

Recording data is your camcorder's information when you have recorded. In the recording mode, the recording data will not be displayed.

When you use data code function, bars (-- - - - ) appear if:

• A blank section of the tape is being played back.
• The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise.
• The tape was recorded by a camcorder without the date and time set.

Data code

The data code is displayed on the TV screen if you connect your camcorder to the TV (p. 38).

PpimechaHne

Ha n3o6paxKeHnx, 3aIncaHHbIX Ha Memory Stick, pa3nUHbIe ycTaHOBKn He 3aIncbIBaHTcA.

3aHncaHHbIe daHHbIe

3aHnHbIe DaHHbIe HecyT INHOpMaUH O 3aHNC, BblONJIeHNHO BaSei BNDeOKaMepo. BpeKIme 3aHNC daHHbIe OTobpaKaTbcN He 6yDyT.

EcnBbIncnoJIb3yeTe yHKcNIO KOda

Various playback modes

To operate control buttons, set the POWER switch to PLAYER.

To view a still picture (playback pause)

Press I during playback. To resume playback, press I or

To advance the tape

Press in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press .

To rewind the tape

Press in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press .

To change the playback direction

Press < on the Remote Commander during playback to reverse the playback direction. To resume normal playback, press .

To locate a scene monitoring the picture (picture search)

Keep pressing or during playback. To resume normal playback, release the button.

To monitor the high-speed picture while advancing or rewinding the tape (skip scan)

Keep pressing while rewinding or while advancing the tape. To resume rewinding or advancing, release the button.

To view the picture at slow speed (slow playback)

Press on the Remote Commander during playback. For slow playback in the reverse direction, press < , then press on the Remote Commander. To resume normal playback, press

IpepeMeHHbIe peXmMbI BOCnpOn3BeDeHn

Дяьылонпени уралнени KMONКAMY yctанови-tepeknioчateь POWER B noJoxeHne PLAYER.

ДлгпрсмOTpa HeNodBnKHO rO n3o6paXeHnra (nay3a BocnpOn3BeDeHnra)

HaxMnTe BO BpEMB BOCPOn3BeDeHnR KhONKy II. INRA BO3O6HOBJeHnO ObBuHOrO BOCPOn3BeDeHnR HaxMnTe KHONKy IINKONKY

Дя уckopehno nepemOTkn JentbI BnepeD

HaxMMTE B pEXMNE OCTAHOBKN KHNKY ▷.ДЯ BO3O6BONJIENNA O6bIYHOBOCNPOM3BeDEHNA HAXMMTE KHNKY

ДлусокорноpeмOTКЛeHTыHA3aД НахKMITEВ ржиме отоановки KMONKY Дл罗BO6OBHOBJIENHЯ OБьИного ВОсрпОНЗЕDEнHЯхKMITE KONKY

ДлИЗМЕнEHHAmpaBNeHNA BOCPON3BeDEHNA

HaKMTe KhoNky <Ha npIbTe DnCTaHmOHHoY npaBHeHn BO BpeM RAocpOn3BeDeHn Iyra N3MeHeHn HApaBHeHn BocpOn3BeDeHn. Iyra BO306HOBJEHn O6bUHOro BOCpON3BeDeHn, OTNyCTte KhoNky

To view the picture at double speed Press × 2 on the Remote Commander during playback. For double speed playback in the reverse direction, press < , then press × 2 on the Remote Commander. To resume normal playback, press .

To view the picture frame-by-frame Press II on the Remote Commander in the playback pause mode. For frame-by-frame playback in the reverse direction, press . To resume normal playback, press

To search the last scene recorded (END SEARCH)

Press END SEARCH in the stop mode. The last 5 seconds of the recorded section plays back and stops.

End Search

When you use a tape without cassette memory, the end search function does not work once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape.

When you use a tape with cassette memory, the end search function works even once you eject the cassette.

In the various playback modes Sound is muted.

When the playback pause mode lasts for 5 minutes

Your camcorder automatically enters the stop mode. To resume playback, press

Slow playback

The slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder; however, this function does not work for an output signal from the DV OUT jack.

When you play back a tape in reverse Horizontal noise appears at the centre or top and bottom of the screen. This is not a malfunction.

Bocnpon3BeDenHe JeHtbl

Для посмотра BOCPON3BedeHn n3o6paXeHn Ha yDBoEHNo ckopoCTn

HaXMMTe KHOHKy × 2 Ha npIbTe DnCTaHcHNOHHOr ynpaBLeHn BO BpeM BOCpON3BeDeHn.ДЯ BOCpON3BeDEHn Ha yDBoEHHo CKOpOCTn B o6paTHOM HApapBHeHn HaxMMTe KHOHky < , a 3aTEM KHOHKy × 2 Ha npIbTe DnCTaHcHNOHHOr ynpaBHeHn.ДЯ BO3O6HOBeHn OblyHORO BOCpON3BeDEHn HaXMMTe KHOHky

Для пokaцрово npocmoТра BOCPON3BedeHnI N3O6paXeHnI

HaxmTe KhONkY II>Ha npIbTe
DnCTaHIOHOrO UnpaBLeHnB PexKMe nay3bl BocpOn3BeDeHn.ДЯ NOKApOBoro
BOcPOn3BeDeHnB O6paTHOM HapBaJIeHn
HaxmTe KhONkY II.ДЯ BO3o6HOBJIeHn
06bUHOro BOCpOn3BeDeHn HaxmTe KhONkY

ДлиносякносядимeroЗапсан Horo 3nnoda (END SEARCH)

HaxmTe KhoNky END SEARCH B pexnme ocTaHOBKn. ByuT BocnpOn3BeDeHb IocneHne 5 cekyIaIncaHnro yuaCTka Ha IeHTe, nocne Yero BocnpOn3BeDeHne ocTaHOBITcH.

Понск Конца

EcIn BbI nCnOJIb3yeTe JeHTy 6e3 KaccTeHoi
nAMrTn, fYHKUIN NOcKa KOHua He 6yDeT
paBOTaTB NocLe N3BLeueHnKacCEtbl, HaJeHTy
KOTOpOI 6blA BbINOLHeHa 3aNNb.
EcIn BbI nCnOJIb3yeTe JeHTy C KaccTeHoi
nAMrTbIO, fYHKUIN NOcKa KOHua 6yDeT
paBOTaTB DaJKe NocLe N3BLeueHnKacCEtbl.

B nepemHeHbIX pexImax BocpOn3BeDeHn 3Byk 6ydet nprrnyuhen.

EcnI pexn may3bl Bocnpon3BedeHn npoDnTc4 5 MNyT

BaSha BnDeOkamepa aBtOMaTnueckn BoiDet BpeKIM ocTaHOBKn.ДЯ BO3O6HOBNeHNA BOCpON3BeDHeHNA HAXMITE KHOKNY

3aMeIeHHoe BocnpOn3BedeHne

3aMeIeHHoe BocPOn3BeHHe MoKeT BbIIOHHTbcra Ha BaWe BnDeOkAmepe 6e3 NOMex; OHaKo 3Ta cyHKunr He pa6oTaet Chepe3 BbIXoHDn CnHnI n3 rHe3da DV OUT.

При Воспpon3ВedeHи ЛeHTыВ образногнанравлеси <|im_start|>assistant

Ha 3kpahe MOryT NOBNTbcr RopnOHTaJIbHbIe NOMEXN IO CEHTpy INJX JKe BBepxu INBn3y 3KpaHa. 3TO He ABnErcr HEnCnPaBHOCTbIO.

Viewing the recording on TV

Connect your camcorder to your TV or VCR with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder to watch the playback picture on the TV screen. You can operate the playback control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on the LCD screen. When monitoring the playback picture on the TV screen, we recommend that you power your camcorder from the mains using the AC power adaptor (p. 18). Refer to the operating instructions of your TV or VCR.

Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV using the A/V connecting cable. Then, set the TV/VCR selector on the TV to VCR.

If your TV is already connected to a VCR

Connect your camcorder to the LINE IN input on the VCR by using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.

Пресмтг заимсниэкpaneх телевизopa

IoiocoeiHInTe Bauy BnDeokamepy K BaueMy TeLeBn3Opy nIIN KBM c nomoubIO coeHNHTelbHoro Ka6eJy ayDIO/BnDEo, KOtOpby npnilaraetcR K Bauey BnDeokampe dI pyncMOrpa BOCnpOn3BODMORO n3o6paxHHe Ha 3KpaHe TELeBn3Opa. Bbl MOxTe OEPnpOBaTb KHONkAMN ynpABLeHnRA BOCpOn3BeDEHem TaKIM Xe CIOcO6M, KaK npu ynpAbeHn BOCnpOn3BODMbIM n3o6paxHHe Hn 3KpaHe JKKD. Ppi ynpAbeHn BOCnpOn3BODMbIM n3o6paxHHe Hn 3KpaHe TELeBn3Opa peKOMeHdyETcnojKnOuTHb NITaHne K Bauey BnDeokampe ot ceTeBOy po3eTKc n NOMOuBu cTeBTO r aanTepa nepemEHoro ToKa (CTp.18).Cm. IHCTpyKzIO NO 3KcPJIyaTaucn Baawero TeLeBn3Opa nIIN KBM.

OTkpOte THe3D0BvO KpbIuKy. NOpCoEInHnTe BaUy BnDeOkamepy K TeLeBn3OpY C NOMoUbO CoeHNHTeBHorO Ka6eY ayDIO/BnDeO. 3aTeM, yCTaHOBe TnepeKJIouHaTeNb TV/VCR Ha BaWem TeLeBn3Op E NpOnJxHne VCR.

EcIn BaW TeJIeBn3Op yXe npDCoeDInHeN K KBM

IopDCoeDHHnTe BaSy BnDEOKaMepy K BxOJHOMy rHe3dy LINE IN Ha KBM c nOmoBHO coEHNHTeJIbHoro Ka6eJa aydno/BnDeo, KOtOpBn npInaraeTc KaBaSe BnDEOKaMepe. YcTaHOBnTe CeNEKTop BxOJHOro CnHaHa Na KBM B noLoXKeHne LINE.

If your TV or VCR is a monaural type

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and the white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. If you connect the white plug, the sound is L (left) signal. If you connect the red plug, the sound is R (right) signal.

If your TV/VCR has a 21-pin connector (EUROCONNECTOR)

Use the 21-pin adaptor supplied with your camcorder.

EcnBaw TeIeBn3Op nJN KBM MOHOΦOHNueCKOro Tnna

IoioceHInHe JeTbI WTeKepe CoeHNHTeBHoro Ka6enA ayDnO/BnDeO K BxODHomy THe3dy BNDeOCnHa, a 6BeIy Inn KpaChbI WTeKepe K BxODHomy THe3dy ayDnOCnHaHa Na KBM nIu TeLeBn3ope. EcnB Bi noCoeHInTe 6BeIy WTeKepe, To Bbl nonyHte CnHaN kAna L (neBoro). A ecn Bbl noCoeHInTe KpaChbI WTeKepe, To Bbl nonyHte CnHaN kAna R (npaBoro).

EcniB Baawem TeleBn3ope/KBM mMeetc 21-7bIpbkoBbI pa3beM (EUROCONNECTOR)

IcnoIb3yIte 21-ItbIpbKOBbl aIaTep, npnlaeraMbl K BaWe BInDeokamepe.

If your TV or VCR has an S video jack Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures. With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks on both your camcorder and the TV or the VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of your TV. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.

EcIn B BaWem TeJIeBn3ope nI KBM IMeeTc rHe3do S bVdeo.

BbIIOJIHnTe CoeINHeHne c nOmoUbIO Ka6eJIa S BnDeo (He npInlaeraTcA) dNl nOlyueHnra BBICOKOKaueCTBeHHoro N3o6paXeHn. PnI daHHOM CoeINHeHn Bam He HuxHo NOcOeINHrTB XeNTbI WTeKeP (BnDeo) COeINHnTeJIbHOro Ka6eJIa ayDnO/BnDeo. IOncOeINHnTe Ka6eJIb S BnDeo (He npInlaraeTcA) K rHe3dAm S BnDeo Ha BaSei BnDEOkampe n BaWem TeLeBn3ope nII KBM. O6patntecb K INCTpyKcIMn PO 3KcNpYatauim Baawero TeneBn3opa. 3To IOcOeINHeHne n03BOJnAE TNOyUHTb BlicOKOKaueCTBeHHoe n3o6paXeHne fOpMaTa DV.

Using the AV cordless IR receiver

Once you connect the AV cordless IR receiver (not supplied) to your TV or VCR, you can easily view the picture on your TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the AV cordless IR receiver.

IcnoJb3OBAHne 6ecnpoBOdHorO IK aydnOBnDeOpnpemHnka

Iocne noDCoeHHeHn 6ecnpoBODHoro IK ayDNOBnDeOpnpnEMnHa Ka BaWemy TeNeBn3opy (He pnnaraeTc) Bbl MoKTe JERKO HabNDoTa b3o6paXHeH Na 3kPaH eBaWero TeteBn3opa. POndpoBHe CbeDeHn CoepKaTcB INHCTpyKmNo IOKnPyAtaTuM 6ecnpoBODHOrO IK ayDNOBnDeOpnpnEMnHa.

LASER LINK

LASER LINK emitter/Излуател LASER LINK

(1) After connecting your TV and AV cordless IR receiver, set the POWER switch on the AV cordless IR receiver to ON.
(2) Turn the TV on and set the TV/VCR selector on the TV to VCR.
(3) Press LASER LINK. The lamp of LASER LINK lights up.
(4) Press on your camcorder to start playback.
(5) Point the LASER LINK emitter at the AV cordless IR receiver. Adjust the position of your camcorder and the AV cordless IR receiver to obtain clear playback pictures.

(1)Послne посоeДинEHЯ K BaшeMy TeLEBn3opy BeCnpoBOdHOrO IK ayDNOBuDeOpnEhMnHa yCTaHOBHTe peKeILOuChaTeIb POWER HA beCnpoBOdHOM IK ayDNOBuDeOpnEhMnHe B noJoxeHne ON.
(2)ВключITE TeleBn3Op uYcTaHOBuTe CeJIeKTop TV/VCR Ha TeleBn3Ope B noJoxKeHne VCR.
(3)HaxMMTe KhoNky LASER LINK. BbICBeTnTcR JAMnOuKa LASER LINK.
(4)HaxKMnte KHOIpKy ▶Ha BaIeien BUNeOKaMepe DnA NaHaJIa BKJIIOUeHINBOCNPOM3BeDEHIN.
(5) HanpaBbTe n3nyuataIb LASER LINK Ha 6ecnpoBoDhbI NK aydnoBvJeOpnEmHnK. Otperyu npyIte noIooJHne BaIeN BnuDeokampebl 6ecnpoBOHorO NK aydnoBvJeOpnEmHnKa IJrNoIyueHnY qETKOrO BOCpOn3BODmORO n306paXeHnA.

To cancel the laser link function

Press LASER LINK. The lamp on the LASER LINK button goes out.

If you turn the power off

Laser link turns off automatically.

Note

When laser link is activated (the LASER LINK button is lit), your camcorder consumes power. Press LASER LINK to turn off the laser link function when it is not needed.

Длг OTMeHbI Φункци ЛаЗepHOrO KaHaJa NepeDaHu CnRHaJIOB

HajmTe KhoNky LASER LINK. JAmnoUka Ha KhoNke LASER LINK norachet.

EcN BbI BbIKIOUHTe NHTaHne

Ja3epHbKaHaJIpeeaCnHaIIOB BbIKJIOUHTcA BtOMaTInCeKn.

PpmeuHne

Прв BKЛIOUeHOM La3ePOM KaHaJIe nepeДaчИ СИгнALOB (Прв 3ТOM BbICBEHbAeTcR KHOПКа LASER LINK) BaSA BnDEOKAMepa notpe6JIeT питанIE. HabKmTe KhoNkY LASER LINK ДЯ БИКЛIOUeHЯФуHKIMI Na3ePHorO KaHApA nepeДaчИ сИгнALOB,ЕСЛОА Ие Тpe6ByeTcR.

Photo recording

You can record a still picture like a photograph. This mode is useful when you want to record a picture such as a photograph or when you print a picture using a video printer (not supplied).

You can record about 510 pictures in the SP mode and about 765 pictures in the LP mode on a 60-minute tape.

Besides the operation described here, your camcorder can record still pictures on Memory Sticks (p. 106) (DCR-TRV10E only).

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.
(2) In the standby mode, keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still picture appears. The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet.

To change the still picture, release PHOTO, select a still picture again, and then press and hold PHOTO lightly.

(3) Press PHOTO deeper.

The still picture in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen is recorded for about seven seconds. The sound during those seven seconds is also recorded.

During recording, the still image you are shooting appears in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen.

ΦOTOCbEMKa

BbMOKeTe 3aINcBbATb HEnoDbNxHoe n06paXeHne pOIO6Ho FOToTpArpn.

Даньий реким полесен, ecIn Bbl xotinte 3aINcBbA Tb N3O6paXeHne B VnDE φOTOCHMka INJI Xe pIn BblONJIHnN OTNeYaTKOB C nOMOsbIO BVIDeONpIHTepa (He npinaraetc).

BbMOxKeTe 3aIncatb Okono 510 n3o6paXeHn BpeXmE SP u OKONo 765 n3o6paXeHn B peXmE LP Ha 60-MnHyThoJ neHTe.

Kpome npBBeHNoB BbIe onepaun, Ba7a BnDEOKaMepa MOxET BbIOJIHNtB 3aINCb HnOoBNXhBIX N3o6paJxHn Ha Memory Stick (cTp.106) (ToIbKO MoJeNb DCR-TRV10E).

(1)Установпейреклочаель POWER в положене CAMERA.
(2)В рекиме окданаши дрхи te cnerka hajkaToI KhoNkpy PHOTO do tex nop, noka He noRbTcH HeNoDbWxHoe u3o6paXeHne. IohBtCn HnDnKaTop CAPTURE. 3aInCb noka eSe He NaJaIacb.

ДяиИЗменин HeNodBnKHOro
I3O6paXeHЯ OTnyCTHTe KhONkY PHOTO,
BbIbepInTe HeNodBnKHOe I3O6paXeHne
CHOBA,a 3aTeM hAXMnte I depXnTe cIerKa
haxaToI KhoNkY PHOTO.

(3)HaxmTe KhoNky PHOTO cnIbHee. HeoDbnKHOe n3O6paKeHne B BuOnckaTeNe nHa n3KpaHe KKd 6yDet 3aINCbIBaTbCra OKJIO cEmn cKynD.B TeueHne 3TuX cEmn cKynD 6yDet 3aINCbIBaTbCra N3BYK.

Bo Bpem 3aIncn, n3o6paXeHne, KOtOpoe Bbl ChmMaTe, IONBNTcB BVIOOnCKaTeNe nnHa 3KpaHe KKd.

PHOTO

2

CAPTURE

PHOTO

3

Notes

• During photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting.
• During photo recording, you cannot turn your camcorder off or press the PHOTO button.
• When recording a still picture, do not shake your camcorder. The picture may fluctuate.
• The photo recording function does not work: - while the fader function is set or in use - while the digital effect function is set or in use
• When ±b flashes, the appropriate brightness may not be obtained.
• When you start photo recording, from normal CAMERA recording, the video flash light (not supplied) does not work ( ±b does not appear).

If you record a moving subject with photo recording function

When you play back the still picture on other equipment, the picture may fluctuate.

To use the photo recording function using the Remote Commander

Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder records a picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder immediately.

To use the photo recording function during normal CAMERA recording

Press PHOTO deeper. The still picture is then recorded for about seven seconds and your camcorder returns to the standby mode. You cannot select another still picture.

Приимechanicals

-BoBpemФOToCbEmKnBbIHeMOKeTe N3MeHrTbpeKIMUNYCTaHOBky.
- Bo BpemФOToCbEmKn Bbl He MoKeTe BbIKIIOuTaB BaUy BNdeOkaMepy NIn HaxkMaTb KhONKy PHOTO.
-ПиЗЗпICИн HeNoДВИЖНО ИЗБрахжЕнЯ HeТРсITE BaMu BInDeOKamepy.ИЗБрахжЕнe MоКeт 6bItb HeYCTOЛHnBbIM.
-ФункцифOTOCbEMKn He pa6OtaeT: -BTOBpEMK, KOrJa yCTaHOBJIeHa NIN INCNoJIb3yETcRФункцифEДepa.
BTO Bpemr, KOrda yCTaHOBJeHa NIN NCNoJIb3yETcFpyHKUuIuPPOBbIX 3ΦΦeKTOB
BoBpemMnraHnIhDnkaTopaHaIeJXaaJrpkOCTbN3o6paKeHnMOKet6bItb6bItbHeNoJIyHeHa.
- EcnBbHaHnHeTe foToCbeMky n3 noJIOXeHHnOBbUHOH 3aIncn CAMERA, naMaBaBNeOBCnbIbIKn (He npnilaraetc) He 6ydetpa6oTaTb (INHdkaTop 4 He NOBHTc).

EcIn Bbl BbInonHaeTe 3aNcB DnKyUeOc0 obBeKta c NOMoMbIO fYHKunf oTOocBemKn

PnBBOcnpOn3BeDeHn HHeoDbNxHoro n306paXeHnHaDpyroAnnapaType n306paXeHne MoKeT 6bItb HeYcToMnHBIM.

ДлИ NCПОЛБ3OBAHINФУнкIMФOTOCБEMКС NOMOUIIpyIbTa DnCTaHUNHOYOrуnpabJIeHIN

HaxmTe KhoNky PHOTO Ha nyIbTe DnCTaHcUOnHOrO ynpaBLeHnA. Ba7a BnDEOkamepa TOTtac Xe 3aNiWeT N3o6paKeHnHa 3KpaHe KKД nIn B BnDOnCKaTeNe.

ДлЯ Исторьоградункции ФотOCБЕМКИ BO Вразma 06byHOn 3aPnCn CAMERA

Haxmnte KhoNky PHOTO noCinbHee.

HenoDbnKHOe 306paXeHne 6ydt 3aNcBbTaBcOKOIO CeM cKeYHd, a 3aTeM BInDeOKaMePaBepHeTcBpeKIM OxuHaHna.

BbI He CMOXKeTe npn 3TOM Bbl6paTb Dpyroe HENoDBrNkHoe N3O6paXeHne.

Printing the still picture

You can print a still picture by using the video printer (not supplied). Connect the video printer using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder.

Connect it to the AUDIO/VIDEO jack and connect the yellow plug of the cable to the video input of the video printer. Refer to the operating instructions of the video printer as well.

If the video printer is equipped with S video input

Use the S video connecting cable (not supplied).

Connect it to the SVIDEO jack and the S video input of the video printer.

EcIn B BnDeOpnpHTepe NMeeTcBxOaHoe rHe3do S BnDeo

NcnoIb3yIte coeHNHtIbHbI Ka6eIb Ka6eIb S BnDeo (He npnilaeraTcra). POnCoeHNHTe erO K rHe3dy S VIDEO n Ko BXoHOMy rHe3dy S BnDeo ha BnDeOpnHTepe.

Using the wide mode

You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on the 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE). Black bands appear on the screen during recording in 16:9WIDE mode [a]. The picture during playing back on a normal TV [b] or a wide-screen TV [c] are compressed in the widthwise direction. If you set the screen mode of the wide-screen TV to the full mode, you can watch pictures of normal images [d].

In the standby mode, set 16:9WIDE to ON in the MENU settings (p. 87).

B pexime oKuJaHnY yCTaHOBtE KOMaHny 16:9WIDE B noJooKeHne ON B yCTaHOBkax MENU (ctp. 87).

To cancel the wide mode Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the MENU settings.

You cannot select the old movie function with DIGITAL EFFECT and the bounce function with FADER.

During recording

You cannot select or cancel the wide mode.

When you cancel the wide mode, set your camcorder to the standby mode and then set 16:9WIDE to OFF.

IcnoJb3OBAHne uHPOKO3KpaHHoro peKIma

B shpoko3kpaHHom peknme

BbI He MoKeTe BbI6paTb fynKcNIO CTapINHOro KnHO C nOMOuBIO fynKcNIM DIGITAL EFFECT IN fynKcNIO nepeCKaKNBaHN C nOMOuBIO fynKcNIM FADER.

BoBpeMa 3aIncn

BbHe MoXKeTe N3MeHnTb INJN OTMeHnTb 1IpOKo3KpaHHbIpeXIM.

EcIn Bb OTMeHnTe ⅢnpOKo3KpaHHbpeKIM, yCTaHOBnTe BaSy BuDeokamepy B peKIM OxndaHnA, a 3aTeM yCTaHOBnTe peKIM 16:9WIDE B noJIoKeHne OFF.

You can fade in or out to give your recording a professional appearance.

BbMOKeTe BbIOJNHTb PnABHO BBeDeHne N BbIEDeHne N3O6paXeHNA, YTO6bI PnJaTb BaWei CbeMke IpoQeCCNoHaJIbHbI BnD.

[a]

STBY

REC

FADER

M.FADER (mosaic)/(m03aɪka)

BOUNC*

(Fade in only)/

(Tolbko BVeDeneHne n3o6paXeHn)

OVERLAP

(Fade in only)/

(Tolbko BVeDeneHne n3o6paXeHnA)

[b]

STBY

REC

MONOTONE

When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to colour.

When fading out the picture gradually changes from colour to black-and-white.

• You cannot use this function when D ZOOM is set to ON in the MENU settings.

MONOTONE

При ВБЕДECHИ N3OБРAXКЕпE 6уDET NOCTENEHNO N3MehaTbca OT YePHO-6eNOro Do ZBeTHoro.

(1) When fading in [a]

In the standby mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.

When fading out [b]

In the recording mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.

The indicator changes as follows:

FADER M.FADER BOUNCE

MONOTONE OVERLAP

no indicator

The last selected fader mode is indicated first of all.

(2) Press START/STOP. The fader indicator stops flashing.

After the fade in/out is carried out: Your camcorder automatically returns to the normal mode.

Before the fade in/out is carried out: Before pressing START/STOP, press FADER until the indicator disappears.

Длг OTMeHbI Функци Фeндара

Iocne toro, KaB BInOnHeO BVeDeHnE/ BBBeHnE N36paKeHnR: Ba7a BInDeOkAmpa aBTOMaTnueckn BepHeTcB O6bUHyb peXm. PpeJ Te, KaB BInOnHnTb BVeDeHnE/ BBBeHnE N36paKeHnR: PpeJ Te, KaH naKaTb KNoNkY START/STOP, NaXmaiTe KNoNky FADER Do Tex nop, noka He nCye3het INDnKaTOp.

Note

You cannot use the following functions while using the fader function. Also, you cannot use the fader function while using the following functions.

• Digital effect
• Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE (Overlap function only)
• NightShot +Slow shutter
• Photo recording

When the OVERLAP indicator appears

Your camcorder automatically stores the image recorded on a tape. As the image is being stored, the OVERLAP indicator flashes fast, and the playback picture is displayed. At this stage, the picture may not be recorded clearly, depending on the tape condition.

When START/STOP MODE is set to or 5SEC You cannot use the fader function.

While using the bounce function, you cannot use the following functions:

• Exposure
  -Focus
  -Zoom
• Picture effect

Note on the bounce function

The BOUNCE indicator does not appear in the following mode or functions:

-D ZOOM is set to ON in the MENU settings
- Wide mode
- Picture effect
- PROGRAM AE

PpimeyaHne

BbHe MoKTe NcNoIb3OBA Tb CJeDyIoUne
fYHKuIN BO BpEmr NcNoJIb3OBAHn r CyHKuIN
peJepa.TakKe,BbHe MoKTe NcNoJIb3OBA Tb
fYHKuINo fpeJepa BO BpEmr NcNoJIb3OBAHn
CJeDyIoUnx FyHKuIN.

-LinФpoBoI ΘΦΦeKT
-PexKIM Hn3KoO OCBeUeHNoCTN PROGRAM AE (ToJbKO fYHKsna HaLoKeHna)
-Houha CbemKa +MeJlENHbI 3aTBop
-ΦOTOCbEMKa

EcJIN NOBNTcHnDnKaTOp OVERLAP

Baisha Bnideokamepa aBTOMaTNUeCKn COxpaHNT n3o6paxeHne HaJeHTe.BoBpeMraCOxpaHeHn n3o6paxeHn HnDnKaTOp OVERLAP 6ydet 6bICTPO MIRATb N 6yDet OTO6paxKaTcBocPOn3BODnMoE n3o6paxeHne. Ha 3tOM 3TaIe N3o6paxeHne MOKeT 6bITb 3aIncAoH neYeTKO B 3aBNCIMOCtN OT OCCTOHN JIeHTbl.

EcIn KOMaHa START/STOP MODE yCTaHOBJIeHa B noJIOXeHne I JnI 5SEC:

BbI He MoXeTe IcNoJIb3ObaTb cyHKUHO feiepa.

Bo BpemnncnoB3OBaHHyHKcnn nepeckaknBaHH BbI He moKeTe nCNOB3OBAt cJeDyUoNe cyHKcnn:

-3Kcno3nua
-ФokycnpOBka
-TpaHcΦokaun
-3cpfeKTn3o6paXeHn

PpmeaHne no yHKnnepeckaBbHa

HdkaTop BOUNCE He noBnEeTcB CLeDyUoXx peKImax nIIN npu nCIOb3OBAHn CLeDyUOxN cyHKcN:

-Komahda D ZOOM yctahOBnHa B nIOJKeHne ON bYcTaHOBkax MENU
-Шпрокозкразнный реким
-3ΦΦeKt n306paKeHnA
-PROGRAM AE

Using special effects - Picture effect

You can digitally process images to obtain special effects like those in films or on the TV.

NEG. ART [a]: The colour and brightness of the picture is reversed.

SEPIA : The picture is sepia.

B&W: The picture is monochrome (black-and-white).

SOLARIZE [b]: The light intensity is clearer, and the picture looks like an illustration.

SLIM [c]: The picture expands vertically.

STRETCH [d]: The picture expands horizontally.

PASTEL [e]: The contrast of the picture is emphasized, and the picture looks like an animated cartoon.

MOSAIC [f]: The picture is mosaic.

[a]

[b]

[c]

IcnoJb3OBAHne CneuJaNbHbIX 3ΦΦeKToB - ΘΦΦeK Tn3o6paXeHnA

BbMOKTe BblONHrTb 6pa6Otky
13o6paXeHnI cIpPoBBIM MeToOM dJI
10nyEnn CneuaJIbHbIX 3cEKeTob, KaB
KNHOJIbMax IIN Ha 3KpaHax TeNeBu3OpOB.

Select the desired picture effect mode in the MENU settings (p. 87).

BbI6epNTe JxenaemblpeKIM3ΦΦeKTa n3o6paXeHnB yCTaHOBkax MENU (cTp. 87).

To turn the picture effect function off

Set P EFFECT to OFF in the MENU settings.

During playback, you can process a scene using the picture effect function

The available picture effects are NEG. ART, SOLARIZE, SEPIA and B&W.

While using the picture effect function

You cannot select the old movie mode with DIGITAL EFFECT.

When you turn the power off

Your camcorder automatically returns to the normal mode.

If you select the picture effect mode in the recording mode

Pictures processed by the picture effect function will be recorded.

When the POWER switch is set to PLAYER

The SLIM, STRETCH, PASTEL and MOSAIC

indicators do not appear in the MENU settings.

ДЯ BBKJIIOUeHЯ ФунКцин эффeKta n3o6paXeHЯ

YcTaHOBnTe KOMaHny P EFFECT B noIooKeHne OFF BycTaHOBkax MENU.

Bo BpemBocnpn3BeHnBb MoKeTe BbINoJHrTb 6pa6OtKy 3N3Oda C NOMOu bU yHKun 3ΦΦeKta n3o6paXeHn

Фф�ektamn n3obpaxeHЯвлгOTcN NEG. ART, SOLARIZE, SEPIA n B&W.

PnncnoB3OBaHm FyHKcH NΦΦekTa n3o6paXeHn

BbI He MoXKeTe BbI6paTb peKIM cTaPunHoro KIno C nOMOuBHO yHKnN DIGITAL EFFECT.

Ecnn BbI BbIKIOHTe NtTaHne

BaSHA BnDEOKaMepa aBTOMaTNUeCKN BepHeTCB O6bIHyI pEXIM.

EcIn BbI BbIbepnTepeKIM 3ΦΦeKtAn306paXeHnBpeKmE3aINc

N3o6paKeHn, BUNOIN3MeHHeHbIe C NOMOuB OfynKcun 3oΦeKTOB N3o6paKeHn, 6yDyT 3aIncahbl.

EcnI nepeKlnuOaTeIb POWER yCTaHOBJIeH B noJoxKeHne PLAYER

Индикаторы SLIM, STRECH, PASTEL m MOSAIC He noBbTcB yctaHOBkax MENU.

Using special effects - Digital effect

You can add special effects to recorded pictures using the various digital functions. The sound is recorded normally.

STILL

You can record a still picture so that it is superimposed on a moving picture.

FLASH (FLASH MOTION)

You can record still pictures successively at constant intervals.

LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)

You can swap a brighter area in a still picture with a moving picture.

TRAIL

You can record the picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left.

SLOW SHTR (SLOW SHUTTER)

You can slow down the shutter speed. The slow shutter mode is good for recording dark pictures more brightly. However, the picture may be less clear.

OLD MOVIE

You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. Your camcorder automatically sets the wide mode to ON, picture effect to SEPIA, and the appropriate shutter speed.

IcnoJb3ObaHne cNeuaJIbHbIX 3ΦΦeKToB - LInΦpOBoN 3ΦΦeKT

BbMOxTe Do6aJIbTb CneUaJIbHbIe 3ΦΦeKtB K 3aINCbIbAeMOMy N3O6paXeHNIO C NOMOuH O pa3HbIX UcΦpOBbIX ΦyHKU. 3aINCbIAeMbI 3Byk 6ByET ObiUHbIM.

STILL

BbMOKTe 3aIINcIbA Tb HeNoDBHXHOe n3o6paXeHne, KOtOpoe MOxHO HanaRaTb Ha nOdBnXHoe n3o6paXeHne.

FLASH (FLASH MOTION)

BbMOKeTe 3aINcBbAtb HEnoDnXHbIe
H3O6paXeHnB INocJeIOBaTeJIbHOCTN Upe3
ONpeJenEHhBe INHTepBaJIbI.

LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)

BbMOKeTe N3MeHrTbApKHe MeCtHa HEnoDBNIXHOM N3O6paXeHn Ha NDoBnXhIe N3O6paXeHn.

TRAIL

BbMOxKeTe 3aINcMbA Tb IN3O6paXeHne C 3ΦΦEKTOM 3ana3DbBaHnI.

SLOW SHTR (SLOW SHUTTER)

BbMOxKeTe 3aMeIINITb CKOpOCTb 3aTbopa. PExKIM MeIeHHOrO 3aTbopa RbIeTcN IOXoJnIM DnIg 3aInc TEmhIx N3O6paXeHn B6Oee npKOM CBte. OdHaKO, I3O6paXeHne MOxKET NOJyUHTbc MEHee YetKIM.

OLD MOVIE

BbMOxKeTe npINBHOCnTb aTMoccpepy CTapHHNHO KIno B N3O6paXeHn. Ba7a BnDEOKamepa 6yDet ABTomatueckn yCTaHaBnBaTb 1IpiPOkO3KpaHnBpeKIM B nIOJoxHe ON, 3ΦΦeKT N3O6paXeHn B nIOJoxHe SEPIA, IN BbICTabnTb COOTBeTCTByIOUyIO CKOpOcTb 3aTBopa.

(1) While your camcorder is in the standby or recording mode, press DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect indicator appears.
(2)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired digital effect mode. The indicator changes as follows: STILL FLASH LUMI. TRAIL SLOW SHTR OLD MOVIE
(3) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The indicator lights up and the bars appear. In the STILL and LUMI modes, the still picture is stored in memory.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.

Items to adjust

STILL	The rate of the still picture you want to superimpose on the moving picture
FLASH	The interval of flash motion
LUMI.	The colour scheme of the area in the still picture which is to be swapped with a moving picture
TRAIL	The vanishing time of the incidental image
SLOW SHTR	Shutter speed. The larger the shutter speed number, the slower the shutter speed.
OLD MOVIE	No adjustment necessary

The more bars there are on screen, the stronger the digital effect. The bars appear in the following modes: STILL, FLASH, LUMI, and TRAIL.

(1)BTOBpemKoIaBaAuaBndeokamepa haoDNTcBpeXmE OxuDaHnN npexkme 3aIncn，HaXMnte KHOkny DIGITAL EFFECT.PoBbTcHnDnKaTop uDpOBOrO 3d6ekTa.
(2)ПовернITE диСК SEL/PUSH EXEC Дпь Вьбopa ржима Нжного сфрворо офдект. Инданкетop 6удET Измehаьс РдуюшIM o6pa3om: STILL FLASH LUMI. TRAIL SLOW SHTR OLD MOVIE
(3)HaKmTe nck SEL/PUSH EXEC. BbICBeTnTcN INHdkaTOp nIOBRTcN NOIocbl B peximax STll LUMl. HenoDbXhHoe nO6paXeHne 6ydt CoXPaHEno B naMTe.
(4)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC Дпя ретулровки зафөгкта.

IyHKtbI dIa peYnnpOBKn

To cancel the digital effect

Press DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect indicator disappears.

Notes

• The following functions do not work during digital effect:
  -Fader
• Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE
• Photo recording
• NightShot +Slow shutter
• The following function does not work in the slow shutter mode:
• PROGRAM AE
• The following functions do not work in the old movie mode:
• Wide mode
• Picture effect
• PROGRAM AE

When you turn the power off

The digital effect will be automatically canceled.

When recording in the slow shutter mode

Auto focus may not be effective. Focus manually using a tripod.

Shutter speed

Shutter speed number	Shutter speed
SLOW SHTR 1	1/25
SLOW SHTR 2	1/12
SLOW SHTR 3	1/6
SLOW SHTR 4	1/3

ДЯ OTMeHbI UΦpOBOrO 3ΦΦeKtA

HaxmTe KhoIky DIGITAL EFFECT. INHdkaTop zuΦpOBOrO əΦΦeKta nCue3HeT.

Приимechanicals

CJeIyUOJIeФyHKcIIH He pa6oTaIOT npnIcNoJIb3OBAHN UcΦpOBOrO əΦΦeKtA:

-Φeɪdεp
-PexkIM Hn3KoO OcBeueHocTn PROGRAM AE
-ΦOTOCbEMKa
-HoHOn CbemKa +MeJleHHbI 3aTBOp

CJIeIyUOuaH cyHKuIN He pa6oTaET BpeKIme MeIeHHOrO 3aTBopa:
-PROGRAM AE
CLeNyUOuNEyHKuINHe pa6oTaIoT BpeXnMeCTapuHHoro KInHO:
-山npoko3KpaHbIpeXIM
-3ΦΦeKt n306paXeHn
-PROGRAM AE

PnBbIKJIIOHeHNIITaHNA

LcfoboB OeFekT 6yET aBTOMaTneCKN OTMeHEN.

Pn3aHncBpeXmmeMeJleHoro 3aTBopa

ABTOMaTnueckaФOKcnpOBKa MoKET 6bITb He 3ΦeKTnBHO. BbINOHteФOKcnpOBky BpyHyIO, NcNoJIb3yI TpeHory.

CKopoctb 3aTbopa

Величина скорoctи 3аТьopa	Скорочь 3аТьopa
SLOW SHTR 1	1/25
SLOW SHTR 2	1/12
SLOW SHTR 3	1/6
SLOW SHTR 4	1/3

Adjusting the white balance manually

You can manually adjust and set the white balance. This adjustment makes white subjects look white and allows more natural colour balance. Normally white balance is automatically adjusted.

In the standby or recording mode, select the desired white balance mode in the MENU settings. (p. 87)

The selected white balance indicator appears.

AUTO (Automatic white balance mode): no indication

HOLD (Hold mode): HOLD

OUTDOOR (Outdoor mode):

INDOOR (Indoor mode):

PeruInpoBka 6aHaHca 6eIoro BpyHyU

Bb moxete oTperynpoBaT b yctaHOBT bByuhyo 6aIaHc 6eIoro. 3Ta perylnpOBka nO3BOJAE TnpIaTb 6eblm 06BeKTam NCTHHO 6eIbI cBT n PO3BOJAE TdoBtbc 6oJee eCTeTBENHO UBeTOBOrO 6aIaHca.

BpeKIMe OxkUdaHnI INIpeKIMe 3aIncu BbIbepInTe HxKbIy peKIM 6aIahCa 6eIoro BVcTaHOBkax MENU (ctp.87)

HOLD (pexim 6loKnpovKn): HOLD

OUTDOOR (pexim "Ha ynue):

To return to the automatic white balance mode

Set WHT BAL to AUTO in the MENU settings.

Cases that you can obtain better results by adjusting the white balance manually

Examples of picture-taking conditions	White balance indicator
·If the lighting conditions, like those at a party, are changing.
·If the picture is being taken in a studio lit by TV lighting.
·If the subject is being lit by sodium- or mercury-vapor lamps.
·At night-time with neon or fireworks in the picture
·At sunrise or sunset	HOLD
·Under daytime-fluorescent light
·If the subject or background is all the same colour.

ДлЯ BOЗВРашени К abTOMaTHueCKOMy peЖIMу 6baHca 6eNoRo

YcTaHOBnTe KOMaHny WHT BAL B noJIOxHeHNE AUTO B yCtHaOBkax MENU.

Cnyu, Korga Bbl Moxete noJyntb lyuune pe3yIbTaI bNyTe mpeyInpOBKn 6aIahca 6eIoro BpyHyIO.

If the picture is being taken in a studio lit by TV lighting

We recommend you to record in the indoor mode.

When you record under fluorescent lighting Use the automatic white balance or hold mode. Your camcorder may not adjust the white balance correctly in the indoor mode.

To record when lighting conditions change

• When you move from indoors to outdoors, or vice versa, or detach the battery for replacement while recording in the automatic white balance mode, point your camcorder at a white subject for about 10 seconds after setting the POWER switch to CAMERA.
• When you move from indoors to outdoors, or vice versa, or change the PROGRAM AE mode while recording in the hold mode, set the white balance to AUTO and reset to HOLD after few seconds.

B clyuae foToIrpapnIpoBaHnI n3o6paXeHnI B CtynI pI TeJeBn3NoHHOM OcBeueHnI.

PekomehdyetcNcNoIb3ObaTbДJIa3aINcN peKIM“B NOMeUeHIN”.

B clyuae 3aHnC npn ocBeueHnn lamPamn DHeBHoro CBeta

UcnoIb3yIte aBtOMaTHueckn pexm 6aIahca 6eIoro nn pezm 6IOKIpOBKn.

BaSHA BnIeOKaMepa MoKET He OTpErpyIuPobA Tb NaIeXaIIM o6pa3OM 6aIaHc 6eIoro B peXJMe "B I NOMeUeHIn".

ДлгздпспprmMeHЯюшхсуcNoBnXOCBeueHn

• Ecni Bbl 3aunn C yunuB I nomueHne nnn HaoobopOT, N6o OTcoeHNnINn 6bTapeHnbI 6bOK dIy 3aMeHbI BO Bpem 3aIncn B aBTOMaTUnyeCKOM peKmE 6baHaNca 6beLoRo, HnPaPbTe BaUy BInDeokamepy Ha 6beln 06BeKT NocLe yCTaHOBKN PepeKnIOuChaTeIa POWER B noJoxKeHne CAMERA INoDepXnTe B TAKOM noJoxKeHn OKOLO 10 cekyHd.
• Ecni Bbl 3aunn C yunuB I nomeueHne nna Hao6oPoT, nIbO nImeHnI pexm PROGRAM AE BO BpeM 3aInCn B pexmme 6IoKupOBKn, ycTaHOBnTe 6BaHaNc 6BeJoro B noIOxKeHne AUTO n Choba BepHnTe B noIOxKeHne HOLD uepe3 HeckOJIbKO CeKyHd.

Using the PROGRAM AE function

You can select PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) mode to suit your specific shooting requirements.

Spotlight mode

This mode prevents people's faces, for example, from appearing excessively white when shooting subjects lit by strong light at weddings or in the theatre.

Soft portrait mode

This mode brings out the subject while creating a soft background for subjects such as people or flowers, and faithfully reproduces skin colour.

Sports lesson mode

This mode minimizes shake on fast-moving subjects such as in tennis or golf.

Beach & ski mode

This mode prevents people's faces from appearing dark in strong light or reflected light, such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski slope.

Sunset & moon mode

This mode allows you to maintain atmosphere when you are recording sunsets, general night views, fireworks displays and neon signs.

Landscape mode

This mode is for when you are recording distant subjects such as mountains and prevents your camcorder from focusing on glass or metal mesh in windows when you are recording a subject behind glass or a screen.

Low lux mode

This mode makes subjects brighter in insufficient light.

Исpenьзованецфункциng PROGRAM AE

BbMOxTe Bb6paTb pexm PROGRAM AE (aBTOMaTHuecka3KcN03nua) B COOTBeCTBm CO CneuHuecknM Tpe6oBaHnMa N CcbemKe.

PexkIM npoxKeTOpHOrO ocBeueHnA

PexkIM cNoptNBbIx COCTa3AHN

3ToT peKIM N03BOLJIeT MHNHMn3IPOBaTb IdoXaHHe npi CbeMKe 6bICTpO DnBXKyUxxCr IpEaMeTOB, HApPImep, npi Irpe B TeHHc nIIN roIbФ.

TIIaXHbI n IbIXHbI peXHM

3TOT peKIM ppeIOTbpaaaet NOBLeHne TEMhBX IINI JIODeB B 3OHe CNJbHOrO CBeta INI OTPaKeHHOro CBeta, HApPImep, HaJIJaKe B pa3rap JeTa INI HA CHEXHOM CKJIOHe.

Pexim 3axoDa coJIHua n lyHbI

3TOT pEXKIM N03BOJAREB TOUHOCTN OTPaKaTb 6OCTaHOBKy PIPN CBeMKE 3axoDOB COHua, 06uX HOUHbIX BnIOB, FneepBepKOB IN HEOHOBbIX peKlAm.

LanDhaΦTbIypeXIM

3TOT pexmI NO3BONAE T BYIOJNHTb CbEmKy OTdAneHbIX O6BeKTOB, TaKNX KaK rOpbl, HAnpIMep, IN PpeODTbPaaaet FOKyCINPOBky BnDEOkAmepbHa CTekNo IIN MeTaJIuYeCKyO peWtKY Ha OKhax, KOrDa BbI BbIOJHReTe 3aNNc b6BeKToB N03aDn CTekNa IIN peWtKn.

Pexm Hn3KoO OCeEHHOCTN

3TOT pexnM denaet Obeekbl npHneIOCTaTOCHOMOCBeseHN.

(1) Press PROGRAM AE in the standby mode. The PROGRAM AE indicator appears.
(2)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired PROGRAM AE mode.

The indicator changes as follows:

IcnoJb3ObaHneФyHKcHn PROGRAM AE

• In the spotlight, sports lesson and beach & ski modes, you cannot take close-ups. This is because your camcorder is set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far distance.
• In the sunset & moon and landscape modes, your camcorder is set to focus only on distant subjects.

• The following functions do not work in the PROGRAM AE mode:

• Slow shutter
  Old movie

• Bounce

• The following functions do not work in the low lux mode:

• Digital effect
  -Overlap

• If you press PROGRAM AE when using the NightShot function, the PROGRAM AE indicator flashes and the PROGRAM AE function does not work.

While WHT BAL is set to AUTO in the MENU settings

The white balance is adjusted even if the

PROGRAM AE function is selected.

Even if the PROGRAM AE function is selected You can adjust the exposure.

If you are recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium lamp or mercury lamp

Flickering or changes in colour may occur in the following modes. If this happens, turn the PROGRAM AE function off.

• Soft portrait mode
• Sports lesson mode

Приимechanicals

BpeKIMax npOKeKToPHorO oCBeUeHnA, cOpTnBbIx CoCTraaHn, a TaKxE B PJIaXHOM nJIbIXHM peXIME Bbl MoKeTe BblOnJIHTb CbEMky KpyINbIM PIIaHOM. 3To O6brcHeTcR TeM, yTO Ba7a BnDeoKaMepa HacTpoHa dIy FOKycNPOBKn TOnkHo Ha ObBeKtbl, HaxOJaIeCeHa cpeHem N daJIbHem paccToHnX.
Bpekime 3axoDa coJHua n Lyhbl, a TaKke B IaHdIaΦTHOM pexime BaIa BnDEOKamepa HacTpoHa Ha QokucpOBky TOnbKO Ha daIbHne oBeKtbl.
Cneyuouune cyuHKnH He pa6oTaIOr BpeXnME PROGRAM AE:

-MeJenneHbI 3aTBoP
-CTapHHoe KINHO
-ПepeckaKaиBaHne

CJIeIyUOUIneФyHKUHnHEpa6oTaIOBpeKIme Hn3KOJOCBeUeHHOCTN:

-LinФpoBoB 3ΦΦeKTe
- HaioxkeHne n3o6paXeHHa

• EÇınl Bbl hʌɡmTe KHOŋkny PROGRAM AE BO BpεmЯ nCNoJIb3OBAHnA ΦyHKιm HocHoN CbEMKn, NaHET MɪræT bɪNДɪKɑTOp

PROGRAM AE,иФункцЯ PROGRAM AE He 6byet pa6oTaTb.

EcIn KOMaHda WHT BAL yctaHoBneHa B noJoxKeHme AUTO b yctaHoBkax MENU

BaIaHc 6eIoro 6yIeT OTepyIuropoBaH, daxe ecnBbIbpaHaФyHKUЯ PROGRAM AE

EcIn BbI6paHaФyHKcINI PROGRAM AE

BbIMoXeTe BbIbpaTb 3KcNo3nHIO.

EcIn BbI BbINOJIHReTe 3aINcB npn IcNoJIb3OBAHm ra3Opa3PdHOJ lambl, HATpneBOJ lamblI nn pTyTHoJ lamblI

B cIeIyIOxN pexIMax MOXET BO3HKnHyTb MepaHne IIN HeYcToHnVBle npOceCbI. Ecnn 3TO npOn3oIDTe, BbIKIOuHTe cyHKUIO

PROGRAM AE.

-MaRkn noptpeThbmypeXIM
-PexkM CnOpTnBbIX COCTaHNI

Adjusting the exposure manually

You can manually adjust and set the exposure. Adjust the exposure manually in the following cases:

The subject is backlit
- Bright subject and dark background
- To record dark pictures (e.g. night scenes) faithfully

(1) Press EXPOSURE in the standby or recording mode. The exposure indicator appears.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the brightness.

PerynipoBka 3Kcno3nCnBpyHyU

BbMOxTe OTpEryIuPoBaTb uYCTaHOBnTb 3KcNo3NtUo BpyHyIO. OTpEryIuPyIte 3KcNo3NtUo BpyHyIO B cJeDyOuX ClyuaX:

-ObbeKT Ha foHe 3aJHeN IODCBETK
Apkn ObeKT Ha TEMHOM oOHe
ДлгЗдзпс TeMHbIX N3Oбхжн (HAnpIMep, HOnHbIX CцeH) C 60Льшо ДocTObeRhoCTbIO

(1)HaKmTe KhoNky EXPOSURE B pexIme OxuDaHnI uIN 3aInCn.

IOrBNTcHnDnKaTOp 3KcNo3nU.

(2)Повернente ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC Дпя ретулровки яркови.

1

2

To return to the automatic exposure mode

Press EXPOSURE again.

Note

When you adjust the exposure manually, the backlight function does not work.

If you change the PROGRAM AE mode or slide NIGHTSHOT to ON

Your camcorder automatically returns to the automatic exposure mode.

Дя BO3Bpata B peKIM aBTOMaTnuecko 3KcNo3nCm

HaxmTe KhoNky EXPOSURE eue pa3.

PpmeaHne

PnBbINOHNHeHnpeyNIpOBKn BpyHyIO fynKzna 3aDne NpOcBETKn He pa6oTaet.

EcIn BbI n3MeHnTe peKmM PROGRAM AE nJIN nepeDbnHeTe nepeKIOuTaTeNb NIGHTSHOT B noJIoXeHne ON

Baasa Bndeokamepa aBTomatueeKn BepHeTcB pexm aBTomatueeKo 3Kcno3u.

Focusing manually

You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases:

• The autofocus mode is not effective when shooting

-subjects through glass coated with water droplets
horizontal stripes
- subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls and sky

• When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in the background
• Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod

ФokycnopoBka BpyHyIO

Bb moxete noIyntb Iyuime pe3yIbTaTbI nyTem peryIinpOBKn BpyHyIO B cIeIyUOux CnyuaX:

• Pexim aBTomatuecko fokycinpobkn YBJIeTcH He3fKeKTHBbIM pN BbIOJIHeHH CbeMKI
  -06bekTOB Ypee3 NOKpbIToe KaJIaMn CTekIIO -Trop3OHTaJIbHbIX NOLOC
  -06bekTOB C MaJIoN KOHTpaCTHO TaKOM 00He, KaC CTeHa NIn He6o
• Ecni Bby XOTnTE BbIIOJIHnTb N3MeHeHne ФOKycuPOBKc C obBeKt Ha nepeJdHem ПlaHa Ha obBeKt Ha 3aJdHem ПlaHa
  Пи ВьлОнHeHи CBeMKn CTaUNOHapHbIX 06beKToB C nCIOJIb3OBAHnEM TpeHOrn

(1) Set FOCUS to MANUAL in the standby or recording mode. The indicator appears.
(2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen focus.

(1)YcTaHOBInTe NpeKJIIOUaTeIb FOCUS B noJIOKeHne MANUAL B pEXnme OxuJaHn IIN peXnme 3aIncI. IoRbNTcN HndnKaTOp F
(2)ПовернITE кольцо Фокс neuropВКДЯ пolyченя чеков Фокс neuropВК.

To return to the autofocus mode Set FOCUS to AUTO.

To record distant subjects

When you press FOCUS down to INFINITY. The lens focuses on and indicator appears. When you release FOCUS, your camcorder returns to the manual focus mode. Use this mode when your camcorder focuses on near objects even though you are trying to shoot a distant object.

Not to make subjects out of focus when using zoom function

Focus after forcing at the "T" (telephoto) position.

It will be harder to focus on when using digital zoom function.

Shooting in relatively dark places or shooting fast-moving subjects in relatively bright places Shoot at the "W" (wide-angle) position after focusing at the "T" (telephoto) position.

When you shoot close to the subject Focus at the end of the "W" (wide-angle) position.

The following indicators may appear

when recording a distant subject.
when the subject is too close to focus on.

ΦokycnpOBKa BpyHyIO

Дя BOЗВрашени B ржим abTomatн ueckо Фокс neuropOKN

YctaHOBInTe nepeKIOuHaTeIb FOCUS B noJoxKeHne AUTO.

Playing back a tape with picture effects

During playback, you can process a scene using the picture effect functions: NEG.ART, SOLARIZE, SEPIA and B&W.

During playback, select the desired picture effect mode in the MENU settings (p. 87). For details of each picture effect function, see page 49.

• ycoBepueHCTBOBaHHbIe onepaun BOCpOn3BeDeHnA

Bocnpo3BeDeHne JeHTbIC 3ΦΦeKtAmn n3o6paXKeHn

Bo BpemBocnpo3BeDeHnBbMOKeTe BUNOIN3MeHrTb N3O6paXeHne C NOMOuB0 fynKcN:NEG.ART,SOLARIZE,SEPIA n B&W.

Bo BpemBocpnOn3BeDeHnBb6epnte Hxhbl 306paXeHnBycTaHOBkax MENU (ctp.87).

Iopobhie CbeHnno KaKdof yHKmU nOeBbIX 3oFekTOB npBeHeHa cTp.49.

To cancel the picture effect function Set P EFFECT to OFF in the MENU settings.

Notes

• You cannot process externally input scenes using the picture effect function.
• To record pictures that you have processed using the picture effect function, record the pictures on the VCR using your camcorder as a player.

Pictures processed by the picture effect function

Pictures processed by the picture effect function are not output through the DV OUT jack.

When you set the POWER switch to OFF or stop playing back

The picture effect function is automatically canceled.

Длг OTMeHbI Φункци 3ффektob n3o6paXeHn

YcTaHOBInTe KOMaHny P EFFECT B noJIoKeHne OFF BycTaHOBkax MENU.

PpimueaHn

BbI He MoXeTe BUNOIN3MeHrTb BBeDeHHbIe N3 BHeUHrero NCTOCHNka N3o6paXeHnC NOMOuBHOyHKuIN 3cpeKToB N3o6paXeHn.
-ДяЗаисизображени，KOTOBIE BbyBnOIM3MeHINC NOMOUIBOФyHKUIN3ΦΦeKTOB 3aNiUnTeI3OBpaJENHa KBM，NcNoJIb3yBaUByBnDeOkamepyB KaueCTBeПлeepa.

N3o6paXeHn, BnDOn3MeHeHHbIe C nOmoUbIO fYHKmN 3ΦΦeKToB N3o6paXeHn

I3o6paKeHn, BUNOIN3MeHHeHbIe C NOMOuB O fynKun 3ofoKTOB I3o6paKeHn, He nepeaIOrTauee3 BbIXoINHOe rHe3do Dv OUT.

EcIn Bby ycTaHOBnI nepeKJIouaTeIb POWERBnoJIOxHeNc OFF nIIO octaHOBNI BOCPpon3BeDeHne

Функциэфсөговизбрахеняыдет abTOMATUcheCKN OTMeHeHa.

Playing back a tape with digital effects

During playback, you can process a scene using the digital effect functions: STILL, FLASH, LUMI and TRAIL.

(1) During playback, press DIGITAL EFFECT and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial until the desired digital effect indicator (STILL, FLASH, LUMI or TRAIL) flashes.
(2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The digital effect indicator lights up and the bars appear. In the STILL or LUMI mode, the picture where you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial is stored in memory as a still picture.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect. For details of each digital effect function, see page 51.

Bocnpo3BeDeHne JeHTbI c uΦpObblm 3ΦΦeKtAmN

Bo BpemBocnpon3BeDeHnB, BbMoXeTe BUnOn3MeHnTb N3O6paXeHne C NOMOuBu OfynKcN: STILL, FLASH, LUMI. n TRAIL.

(1)BoBpMaBOcnpOn3BeDeHn，HaXmnte KhONKy DIGITAL EFFECT n nobopauBaIte DnCK SEL/PUSH EXEC Do tex nop, noka He NaHuHT MInTaT b INdNkAtOp HxKHoTo cnpoBoro 3ΦΦekTa (STILL, FLASH, LUMI. nlin TRAIL).
(2)HaXmTeIINCKSEL/PUSH EXEC. BbICBETNTcHINDnKATOpUcΦpOBOrO 3ΦΦeKTaIIOBBAITcNOLocI.BpeXmE STILLIIN LUMI.N3o6paXeHne,HaKOTopOM Bbl HaXMeTe KHOkNy IINCKSEL/PUSH EXEC, 6yDet3aHeCtEOBnAMrTbKaKHeIOdBnXHoe n3o6paXeHne.
(3)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC Дпя ретулровки зфөкта ИЗбрахеня. Пдробны сөсөдэнгий по калдүлүйсүлүровых зфөктов пивeteнь на CTР. 51.

To cancel the digital effect function Press DIGITAL EFFECT.

IITMHeB1yHKcHnCnΦpOBbIX 3ΦΦeKTOB

Hakmte KhoNky DIGITAL EFFECT.

Notes

• You cannot process externally input scenes using the digital effect function.
• To record pictures that you have processed using the digital effect, record the pictures on the VCR using your camcorder as a player.

Pictures processed by the digital effect function

Pictures processed by the digital effect function are not output through the DV OUT jack.

When you set the POWER switch to OFF or stop playing back

The digital effect function is automatically canceled.

PpmeaHn

BbI He MoXeTe BUNOIN3MeHrTb BBeDeHHbIe N3 BHeUHrero NcTOUYHnKa N3o6paXeHnC nOMOuBIO cyHKun cNpOBoBix 30fekTOB.
-ДяЗаисиИЗображени,КOTObIe BblBIDOn3MeHnC NOMOuBуФyHKUIN3ΦΦeKToB ИЗображени,ЗЯIMiTeIиЗображени Ha KBM,ИспOlb3уВaшуВиDeOkamepyВ KaueCTBe Плелepa.

N3o6paXeHn, BnOu3MeHeHHbIe C NOMOaBIO cyHKmU nOpOBbIX 00

I3o6paKeHnBUNOIN3MeHHeHbIE C NOMOuBo OyHKUIN 3oFKeKTOB I3o6paKeHn, He nepeaIOrcape3 BbIXoINHO rHe3do Dv OUT.

EcIn Bby ycTaHOBnI nepeKJIouaTeIb POWERBIOJoxeHne OFF nIO ocTaHOBnI BOCpON3BeDeHne

Функцицрьхь6фпektob6удет abTomatueckn OTmeHeHa.

Quickly locating a scene using the zero set memory function

Your camcorder goes forward or backward to automatically stop at a desired scene having a tape counter value of "0:00:00". You can do this with the Remote Commander. Use this function, for example, to view a desired scene later on during playback.

(1) In the playback mode, press DISPLAY.
(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to locate later. The tape counter shows "0:00:00" and the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes.
(3) Press when you want to stop playback.
(4) Press to rewind the tape to the tape counter's zero point. The tape stops automatically when the tape counter reaches approximately zero. The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator disappears and the time code appears.
(5) Press . Playback starts.

БыICTpoe OTbICKaHne 3ПИЗODa C NOMOUsbIO Функципamrtu HUJIeBOI OTMeTKN

BaWbIeOkaMepa BbIOnHReT npoDBNKeHne Bnpei H3aD C ABTOMaTIueCKoI OCTaHOBkoB H yHKOM 3IN3Ode, Ige NOKa3aHne CcHTeYJIeTHbI paBHO "0:00:00". Bbl MoKTe BblONHrTa 3TO C NOMOuBIO NJbTa DInCTaHcNOHHOr OynpAabHeHry. UcNoIb3yUte 3Ty yFHKUIO, HnPImep, IJr pOCMOptRa HxHOrO 3IN3Oda nO3Ke BO BpEMr BOCNPQo3BeDEHnR.

(1)В ржиме BOCIPON3BedeHЯнхмITE KhoIGNy DISPLAY.
(2)HaxmTe KhoIky ZERO SET MEMORY B MeTe, KOtOpoe Bby 3aXOTnTe NaITn PO3Ke. Ioka3aHHe CHTuKa CTAHet paBbIM "0:00:00", n HauHET MraTb INdNkATOP ZERO SET MEMORY.
(3)HaxmTe KhONky ■,ecnBb 3axOTte HaxKaTb OCTaHOBtB BOCIpOUN3BeDeHne.
(4)HaxmTe KhoNky dIy yckOpEHNOI nepeMOTKn IeHTbI Ha3aD K HynEBoT ToUKe CteTnKa IeHTbI. JeHTa OCTaHOBNTcA aBTOMaTtueCeKn, eCNI ChETuK DoCTnHET HnyEBoI OTMeTK. INdkaTop ZERO SET MEMORY uChue3HeT, nNoBtca KoD BpeMeHn.
(5)HaxMMTe KHOJIky ▲. HauHETcB BOCnPOn3BeDeHHe.

Notes

• When you press ZERO SET MEMORY before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory function will be canceled.
• There may be a discrepancy of several seconds from the time code.
• The zero set memory function may not work when there is a blank portion between pictures on a tape.

ZERO SET MEMORY functions also in the recording standby mode

When you insert a scene in the middle of a recorded tape, press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to end the insertion. Rewind the tape to the insert start point, and start recording. Recording stops automatically at the tape counter zero point. Your camcorder returns to the standby mode.

PpimueaHn

• EcnBbI haxMeTe KhoNky ZERO SET MEMORY DO nauJa obpaTHOI nepeMoTkn JeHTbl,TO cyHKpIa NAMrTH HynBeOYOTmTK 6byET OTMeHena.
  Moxet 6bIb pacOXJ.deHne B HecKoJIbKO CekyHd MEXdKOJOMBpEMeHn I DeIeCTBnTehBm BpeMeHem.
  ΦyHKZnI NAMrTn HJyBeO IOTMeTK MoKET He pa6oTAtb B CJyae,ecJN IMeTcR He3aIMCaHHbYuACTOK Mekdy n3o6paxKeHnMn Ha JeHe.

ФункцЯ ZERO SET MEMORY pa6oTaet TaKxE B pexmme roTOBHOCTn 3aHNCN

Ecnn Bbl BCTaBnTe 3n3oD B cepenHe 3anicaHNOJIeHTbI, HaxmTe KhONky ZERO SET MEMORY BY Tom MecTe, Ige Bbl XoTne 3aKOnHTb BCTaBkY 3n3Oda. NpeMOTaHTe JENTy K MeCTy HauJana BCTaBKn 3n3Oda n HauHNTe 3aNcB. 3aNcB octaHOBTcA bTOMATueCKn B MeCTe HUJEBOI OTMeTKu CchETtHu. BaJa BuDEOKaMepa BepHETcB peXIM OxNDAHn.

Searching a recording by date - Date search

You can automatically search for the point where the recording date changes and start playback from that point (Date search). Use a tape with cassette memory for convenience. You can do this with the Remote Commander.

Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each recording date.

Searching for the date by using cassette memory

You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 129).

(1) Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
(2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the MENU settings (p. 87). Factory setting is ON.
(3) Press SEARCH MODE repeatedly, until the date search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: TITLE SEARCH DATE SEARCH PHOTO SEARCH PHOTO SCAN no indicator
(4) Press or to select the date for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected date.

Searching for the date without using cassette memory

(1) Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
(2) Set CM SEARCH in to OFF in the MENU settings (p. 87).
(3) Press SEARCH MODE repeatedly, until the date search indicator appears.

The indicator changes as follows:

DATE SEARCH PHOTO SEARCH PHOTO SCAN no indicator

(4) Press to search for the previous date or press to search for the next date. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the point where the date changes. Each time you press or your camcorder searches for the previous or next date.

To stop searching

Press ■.

Notes

• If one day's recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately find the point where the recording date changes.
• The cursor in the 00 mark indicates the present point on the tape.

If a tape has a blank portion between

recorded portions

The date search function may not work correctly.

Cassette memory

The tape cassette memory can hold six recording date data.

Ponck 3aIncn no daTe

ДлЯ OCTaHOBKII NOUcKa

HaxmTe KhoNky

Ponck 3aIncn IIO daTe 6e3 nCNoJIb3OBAHnKacCeTHoI naMrtN

(1)Установпейсяклочаель POWER в поожене PLAYER.
(2) YcTaHOBInTe KOMaHdY CM SEARCH B CmB noJoxeHne OFF B ycTaHOBkax MENU (cTp. 87).
(3)HaximMaTe NOBtOpHo KhoNky SEARCH MODE Ha npIbTe DnCTaHcNoHnHO ynpaBHeHnDo TEx Nop, noka He NoRbHT HndKATOP NOnCKa DaTbl.

Инд 6удET ИЗмЕТьСА СLEДУЮшМ 06pa3OM:

DATE SEARCH PHOTO SEARCH PHOTO SCAN 6e3 uHdikKaTopa

(4)HaxmTe KhoNkU dIy nonka npdeI dyuei DaTbI IIN Jx He HaxmMaTe KhoNkU dIy noncka cIeDyIOeJ DaTbI. BaIe BnDeOKaMepa aBTOMaTNUeCKn HaCyHT BocPOn3BVeDEHne B MeCe, rIe N3MeHReTcI daTa.BcKn pa3 npn HaxKatNI KhoNkI dIy BaIa BnDeOKaMepa BblONHRe TNONCK npdeI dyuei IIN CNeDyIOeJ DaTbI.

Длг octahOBkn NOUCKa

HaxmTe KhONKy

PpIMeuaHn

• EcnI npOdoJnxNteBbocTb 3aHcN OndHOrO dHa MeHee DByx MInHyT, Ba7a BnDeOkamepa MoKcET He TOUHO NaTe MeCTO, rDe N3MeHReTcR DaTa.
  KypcopBINHnKaTope yKa3bIbaETekyuee MeCTO HaJeHTe.

EcIn Ha 3aIncahHoi JeHte NMeIOTc H3aIncAHbIe YUacTkn

KaccetHaI NaMAtb Ha JeHTe N03BOJIaRET BMECTHT Do UeCTn DaT 3aINcN.

Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by title - Title search

CM only

If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can search for the boundaries of recorded tape by title (Title search). Use the Remote Commander for this operation.

(1) Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
(2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the MENU settings (p. 87). Factory setting is ON.
(3) Press SEARCH MODE repeatedly, until the title search indicator appears.
(4) Press 1 or 2 to select the title for playback.

Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that you selected.

If you use a tape without cassette memory. You cannot superimpose or search a title.

To superimpose a title

See page 79.

If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions

The title search function may not work correctly.

ДлЯ OCTaHOBKn NONCKa

HaxmTe KhOnKy ■

EcIn BblncnoIb3yTe JeHtyc KaCCeTHoI nAMrTbIO

BbI He MoXeTe BblIOJIHrTb HANOKeHne nn nnONCK TnTa.

ДЯHAJOLOXKeHnTHTpa

CM. cTp. 79.

EcJnHaJIeHTe NmEeTcH He3aIncaHHbI yuactOK MeKdy 3aIncaHHbIMu YactAMN FyHKsI IONCKa TITpa MoKet He pa6oTaTb HaJIeXaUIM O6pa3OM.

Searching for a photo - Photo search/Photo scan

You can search for a still picture you have recorded on a mini DV tape (photo search). You can also search for still pictures one after another and display each picture for five seconds automatically regardless of cassette memory (photo scan). Use the Remote Commander for these operations. Use this function to check or edit still pictures.

Searching for a photo by using cassette memory

You can use this function only when playing back a tape with cassette memory (p. 129).

(1) Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
(2) Set CM SEARCH in to ON in the MENU settings (p. 87). Factory setting is ON.
(3) Press SEARCH MODE repeatedly, until the photo search indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows: TITLE SEARCH DATE SEARCH PHOTO SEARCH PHOTO SCAN no indicator
(4) Press or to select the date for playback. Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo having the date that you selected.

ДЯ OCTaHOBKn NOUcKa Haxmite KhONky ■.

To stop searching Press

If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions The photo search function may not work correctly.

EcIn Ha JeHTe NMeeTc Hes3aNcaHHbIyUyactOK MExdy 3aNcaHHbIMu YacTAMnФyHKsIg FOToONUCKa MoKET He pa6oTaTbHaJdJIeKaUIM O6pa3OM.

Searching for a photo without using cassette memory

(1) Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
(2) Set CM SEARCH in to OFF in the MENU settings (p. 87).
(3) Press SEARCH MODE repeatedly, until the photo search indicator appears.
(4) Press or to select the photo for playback. Each time you press or your camcorder searches for the previous or next photo.

Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo.

To stop searching

Press ■.

Scanning photo

(1) Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
(2) Press SEARCH MODE repeatedly, until the photo scan indicator appears.
(3)Pressor

Each photo is played back for about 5 seconds automatically.

PonckΦOTO 6e3 nCnoJb3OBaHnKaCCETHOI pAMrTIN

(1)Установпейpeклочаель POWER в положене PLAYER.
(2) YcTaHOBnTe KOMaHny CM SEARCH B CnIOJoxeHne OFF B ycTaHOBkax MENU (cTp. 87).
(3)HaximaiTe NOBTOPO KHOKky SEARCH MODEHa npIbTe DnCTaHcIOHnHO ynpaBHeHnDoTexnop,NOKa He NoBHTca HNDNKaTOPΦOTONOICKa.
(4)Haxmte KhoNky I nnI □I BbIbopa foTo dIy BocnpOn3BeDeHn. BcKni pa3 npn Haxatnn KhoNkn I nnI Ba7a BIneOKamepa BblONHReT nonck npdeBlyuero nIi CneDyUoJero foTO. Ba7a BIneOKamepa aBTOMaTHueCKn HaHTet BOCnpOn3BeDeHne foTO.

ДлгocтабкнпОпска

HaxmTe KhOpKy ■

Сkaнрованые φοTO

(1)Установпейреклочаель POWER в положене PLAYER.
(2)HaximmaTe NOBtOHO KhoNky SEARCH MODE do Tex np, noka He noBntc HnDnKaTOp fOToCKaHIpOBaHn.
(3)HaxmTe KhoNky I nnI Kaxdoe foTo 6yDet aBtOMaTnueckn OTo6paXaTbc npImepHo 5 cKyHd.

To stop scanning

Press ■.

ДлЯ OCTaHOBKn CkaHIpObaHnA

HaxmTe KhoNky

Dubbing a tape

Using the A/V connecting cable

Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder.

Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE, if available.

(1)Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2)Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
(3) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.
(4)Start recording on the VCR.

Парапсь Ленты

UcnOJIb3OBAHnE CoeINHITeIbHOro Ka6eJyauDIO/BuDeO

IoioceiHnTe Bauy BIndeokamepy K KBM c nOmoaBIO coeHNHTelbHoro Kaebna aydno/ BIndeo, KOtOpBn npinaraetc K Bauei BIndeokamepe.

YcTaHOBtCeJIeKToPbI NepeKJIuOaTeIb BxOJHOro CnHaHa Na KBM B nIoXeHne LINE, ecNn TaKOBoe IMeETc.

(1)BcTaBbTe He3aIncaHHyIo JeHTy (IINI JeHTy, Ha KOTopyIO Bbl XOTnte BblONHnTb 3aIncb) B KBM u BcTaBbTe 3aIncaHHyio JeHTy B BaUy BuJeOKaMepy.
(2)Установпейразець POWER в положене PLAYER.
(3)HaunHe BocnpOn3BeJeHne 3aIncaHnoJIeHTbI Ha BaSei BnDeokampe.
(4)HaunHe 3aIncB Ha BaWeKM.

When you have finished dubbing a tape

Press on both your camcorder and the VCR.

Ecnn Bbl 3aKOHnJI npe3anCb JeHTbI

HaxmTe KhoNky KaK Ha BnDeokamepe, TaK nHa KBM.

If you have displayed the screen indicators on the TV

Make the indicators disappear by pressing SEARCH MODE or DATA CODE on the Remote Commander or DISPLAY so that they will not be superimposed on the edited tape.

You can edit on VCRs that support the following systems

8 8 mm, HiHi Hi8, Digital8, VHS VHS, SVHS S-VHS, VHSC VHSC, SVHSC S-VHSC, Betamax, Mini DV or DV

If your VCR is a monaural type

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting cable to the video input jack and the white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and the red plug is connected, the right channel audio is output.

Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to obtain high-quality pictures

With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable.

Connect an S video cable (not supplied) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the VCR. This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.

При OTОбрахени 3краньх ИнданkaTopoB На 3кразе Телевизopa

Добerteсьтого,чTOбыИнДикаторьИсчezин,нжимаяКнONКY SEARCH MODE Ил_DATA CODEHa nIbTeДиCTaHионHorOупавлени Ил кНОКу DISPLAY,TakчTOбыОн HeБыИн HANOKeHыHaMOHTaЖHyЛeHTy.

BbMOxTe BbIOnHrMbontax Ha KBM, KOtOpbIe NODepKINBaIOT cIeDyUoune CnCTembl

8 MM, Hi8 Hi8, Digital8, VHS VHS, SVHS S-VHS, VHSC VHSC, SWSC S-VHSC, Betamax, MHN DV Mini Dn Dv D

EcnBaw KBM MOHOpOHneckoro Tnna

IoiDCoeHInHe JxenTbI uTekep coeHNHTelbHOro Ka6eRa ayDnO/BnDeo K BXoDHOMy rHe3dy BuJeocnHana, a 6eBtI nII KpaCHN bUTekep K BXoDHOMy rHe3dy ayDnOCnHana Ha KBM nIu TeneBu3ope. EcNI noDCoeHIneH 6eBtUeKeP, To 3ByK 6yDet pa3DaBaTbcra C neBoro KaHana, a ecNI noDCoeHIneH KpaChN bTekeP, To 3ByK 6yDet pa3DaBaTbcra C npaBOrO KaHaJa.

BbINOJIHnTe NIOcOeINHeHne c NOMOuIko Ka6eJ S BnDeo (He npNJraTaTc) dNpONyueHn BBICOKOKaYeCTBeHHbIXn306paKeHn

PnTakOM PNOCDOeINHEnn Bam He HUxHo
NoDCOEINHbTB JKeIbY (BnDeo) uTekep
COeINHITBeHbHO Ka6eJe aUYIO/BuDeo.
PiDCOEINHTE Ka6eJb S BuDeo (He
PnInaeraTc) K IHe3dAm S BuDeo Ha BaSei
BuDEOKaMepe n KBM.
PnDAnHOM PNOCDOeINHEnn Bbl CMOXeTe
noLyHTb BblCOKKaueCTBeHNbIe N306paKehn
fOpMaTa DV.

Using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)

Simply connect the VMC-IL4435/2DV/4DV i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not supplied) to DV OUT and to DV IN of the DV products. With digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. You cannot dub the titles, display indicators or the contents of cassette memory.

(1)Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2)Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
(3) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.
(4)Start recording on the VCR.

IcnoJIb3OBAHnE Ka6eIaLINK (coeHNHTeBHyI Ka6eIb DV)

ПрocTo noДcoeДинTe Ka6ь VMC-IL4435/ 2DV/4DV i.LINK (CoeДинТeьнБиКа6ь DV) (He npilaraetc) K rHes3d y DV OUT n rHes3dy DV IN uФровь BvDoeon3delen. C nOmoшьo coeДинЕнЯ uФровьМ k6beIem BvDoe- aydInocrHaNbl NepeDAIOCTB uФрobOу ФорMe ДЯ NOCEdYUOJIeBO BbICOKOKaueCTBEHHORO MONTaKa. BBy He MoKeTe nepe3aINCbBaT bTNtPb, INdNKaTopb Na DCnPIee NII cOdePkahne KACCETHOI pAMrTn.

(1)BCTaBbTe He3aIncAHHyIO JeHTy (IINI JeHTy, Na KOTOpYIO XOTnTE BblIOJIHnTb 3aIncB) B KBM IN BcTaBTe 3aIncAHHyIO JeHTy B BuJeOKaMepy.
(2)Установпейразковая对外开放 POWER B NOJOKEHNE PLAYER.
(3)HaunHe BoCnpOn3BeJeHne 3aIncaHnoJIeHTbI Ha BaWei BnDeOkaMepe.
(4)HaunHe 3aIncHb Ka KBM.

When you have finished dubbing a tape

Press (STOP) on both your camcorder and the VCR.

You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable).

During digital editing

You cannot use DIGITAL EFFECT button functions.

If you record playback pause picture with the DV OUT jack

The recorded picture becomes rough. And when you play back the picture using the other video equipment, the picture may jitter.

To perform a more precise editing (DCR-TRV10E only)

Use DV synchro-editing function (p. 74).

EcnBb3aKOHnJIpe3aIncbJeHTbI HaxmTe KhoNky (STOP) ka Ka Ha BaWei

Bndeokamepe, TaK n Ha KBM.

Bb moXeTe NOdcoEduHHTb OINH TOIbKO KBM c nOmoosbu Ka6eIa.LINK (coeDnHtJIbHbI KAbDV).

BoBpemr znpboBOrMOHTaxa

BbI He MoXeTe IcNoJIb3OBA Tb cyHKUIN KHOJOK DIGITAL EFFECT.

EcIn BbI BbINOHNn 3aNNc bN3o6paXeHnuepe3 rHe3do DV OUT

3aIncaHHe n3o6paXeHne cTaHET rpybIM.A ecnBbl 6ydeTe BocnpOn3BOJNb n3o6paXeHne ha dpyroBnDeOaannapatype,TO n3o6paXeHne 6byedNoDparuBaTb.

ДЯ ВылОнHeHЯ 60Jee ToCHOrO MOHTaJa (ToIbKO MoeJIb DCR-TRV10E)

IcnoIb3yIe cyHKuHcNHXPOHHOro MoHTaKa DV (ctp. 74)

Editing partially on a DV tape - DV synchro-editing (DCR-TRV10E only)

By simply selecting the scenes to edit, you can duplicate the desired portion on a tape, using other equipment connected with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable). The scenes can be selected by frame. Since your camcorder exchanges digital signals, you can edit with little audio and video deterioration.

You cannot duplicate titles, display indicators, or the contents of cassette memory.

The connection is the same as on page 73.

(1) Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder and insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the DV product.
(2) Set the POWER switch of your camcorder to PLAYER.
(3) Set the input selector to DV input on the DV product. If the DV product is another DV camcorder, set its POWER switch to VTR.
(4) Press MENU to display the menu.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ETC, then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select DV EDITING, then press the dial.
(7) Using the video control buttons, locate the point where you want to start editing, then press to set your camcorder in the playback pause mode (p. 161).
(8) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial or MARK on the Remote Commander to set DV EDITING IN.
(9) Using the video control buttons, locate the point where you want to end editing, then press to set your camcorder in the playback pause mode.
(10)Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial or MARK on the Remote Commander to set DV EDITING OUT. The editing process starts. When the process ends, your camcorder and the DV product automatically set to pause mode.

MoHTaX NO qaCTaM Ha JeHtY DV - CnHxPoHHbI MOHTaX DV (ToJIbKO MoJeJIb DCR-TRV10E)

BbIbIpa3nI3OdbI dIy moHTaKa, Bbl MoXeTe BbIbONHbTbpe3aINcBHyKhbix yuactKOB Ha IeHTy, nCpOJIb3yI dpyrIyO annapaTypy, noCooeiInHeHHyIO cNoMOUbIO Ka6eJIa I.LINK (coEHNITbHbIKa6eJIb DV). 3nI3Odb MoXHO BbIbPaTB NO kaJdPam. NocKoJIbKy BaHa b BuDeOKaMepa BblbONHReT oMeH uΦpoBbIX CnHAlOB, BblMoXeTe BblONHbTb MoTAtk LIIbC He3NaHTeJIbHbIM yUdWeHmE 3Byka n BuDeOn3O6paXeHNI.

BbHe MoXeTe Nepe3aNcBtBaT TnTpbl, HnDnKaTopbl Ha DnCnPee Nn CoepXaHne KACCETHOI nAMrTu.

Данhoe coeДиЕнHe IeBnIeTcTaKIM JKe, KaK NHa cTp. 73.

(1) BCTaBbTe 3aIncaHHyIO JeHTy B BaUy BnDEOKaMepy I BcTaBbTe He3aIncaHHyIO JeHTy (JINI JeHTy, Ha KOTOpO BbXOTnte BblONHnTb Nepe3aIncb) B annapaT DV.
(2)Установские посяклоуатель POWER на Baший Видаокаме Рожонке PLAYER.
(3) YctaHOBIne BXoJHOI cJIeKTop B noLoXeHne BXoJHOrO CnHana DV ha annapate DV. EcII annapat DV rBnEeTcA npRoB BuJeOKaMepo DV, yCTaHOBIne nepeKnIOuATeIb POWER B noLoXeHne VTR.
(4) HaxmTe KhoNky MENU ДЯ OTo6paXeHnMaMeHIO.
(5)ПовернITE диСК SEL/PUSH EXEC Дпь Выбoga установки ETC,затем нахмпес.
(6)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЯ Быбopa установки DV EDITING, за tem НашмITE ДИСК.
(7) VcnoIb3yK KHONKn BnDEoKOHTpONa, HauDiTe MeCTO, rge Bb XOTNe Haayatb MOHTaX, 3aTeM hAXmTe KHOKNy I dny yctahOBKn BaSeu BnDEoKaMeBb I pexNM nay3bI BocnpOn3BeDeHnA (CTp. 161).
(8) Haxmnte dnck SEL/PUSH EXEC nnn KhoNky MARK Ha nyIbTe dncTaHcNoHHoro ynpaBJIeHnI dIy BblOJIHeHnY cTahOBKn DV EDITING IN.
(9) IVcnoIb3yK KHONKn BIndeOeKOHTpOJIa, HauDte MeCTo, Ige Bbl XOTNe 3aKOHuTbMOHTaX, 3aTeM hAekMNTe KHNKy II JIbIbIOJHHeN yctaHOBKn Bauei BInDEOKaMEpbI BpeXm npay3blBOcnpOn3BeDeHn.
(10)Haxmnte nck SEL/PUSH EXEC nnn KhoNky MARKHa npIbte dntaHnOHoro ynpaBHeHHdIy yCTaHOBKn DV EDITING IN. HauHetc npOeCC moTaxa. Korda moHTax 3aKoHnTcH, Ba7a BnDeokamepa n annapat DV abTomatUneckn 6dyt yCTaHOBJIeHb I peXIM nay3bl.

Notes

• If you use other than Sony equipment with the DV jack, you cannot perform DV synchro-editing.
• If a tape has a blank portion between recorded portions, DV synchro-editing may not work correctly.

Errors in duplicating

If you connect your camcorder to Sony equipment with DV jack, the range of errors is within + / - 5 frames. The range may become wider in the following conditions.

• The interval between DV EDITING IN and OUT is less than five seconds.
• DV EDITING IN or OUT is set at the beginning of the tape.

If you do not make connections with i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)

The screen shows NOT READY, and you cannot select DV EDITING.

On a blank portion of the tape

You cannot set DV EDITING IN or OUT.

PpimueaHn

• Ecnn Bbl nCnNoB3yeTe annapatypy c rHe3dOm D, He oTHocRyOcK rN3deJIaMФIpMbI Sony, Bbl He CMOxEte BblONHrTb CNHXPOHHbIM MOHTaX DV.
• Ecnn Ha JeHTe NMeETcH He3aNtcaHHbI yAchTOK MeJxD 3aNtcaHHbIM YactrMn, CnHXPOHHbI MOHTaK DV MOKeT He pa6oTaTb HAnLeXaUIM 06pa3OM.

Own6kn npn nepe3anncn

Ecnn Bby noDcoeHnHnBawy BNdeokamepy K annapaTy Sony C rHe3dOm DV,TO dnaana3oH oW6OK bYedT B npeJenax + / - KaIPOB. Dnaana3OH MoKet 6bITb WInpe B cIeNyUOxNcLyuJaX.

• INTePbAm MeJxNy yCTaHOBkAmn DV EDITING IN N OUT MeHee pTn cekyHd.
• YctaHOBka DV EDITING IN uIN OUT BbIOnHeHa B CaMOM HaJaNe JeHTbl.

EcIn BbI He BblIOJIHReTe NoDcoEINHeHm C nOmoUbIo Ka6eJI i.LINK (coEINHTeBbHbI Ka6eB DV)

Ha 3kpAHe IIOBNTcH INIINKaUNA NOT READY, n Bbl He CMOXeTe BbIbpaTb yCTaHOBky DV EDITING.

Ha He3anHcHOM yactke Jehtbi

BbI He MoXeTe BbIIOJIHHTb yCTaHOBky DV EDITING IN uNn OUT.

You can record an audio sound to add to the original sound on a tape by connecting audio equipment or a microphone. If you connect the audio equipment, you can add sound to your recorded tape by specifying starting and ending points. The original sound will not be erased. Use the Remote Commander for this operation.

Aydnopepe3a\Pncb

BbMOxTe 3aHcBt ayDnOcnHnB DOnONHeHne K nepBOHaJbHOMy 3ByKy Ha JeHTe, POnCoEHNHB ayDnOaHnapat NmMKnPOcoH. EcN Bb IOnCoeDnHte ayDnOaHnapat, Bb MOxTe Do6aBnTB 3ByK Ha BaUy 3aIncanHyIO leHTy nyTe yKa3aHnToueK hauana n OKoHuaHn. PerBoHaJbHbI 3ByK He 6yDet CTeP rnp 3Tom. IcNoJIb3yIte npIbT dNCTaHcNOHHOrO yIpaBLeHnДЯ 3ToI onepaunn.

Connecting the microphone with the MIC jack

You can check the recorded picture and sound by connecting the AUDIO/VIDEO jack to a TV. The recorded sound is not output from a speaker. Check the sound by using the TV or headphones.

BbMOxKeTe npOBepntb 3aHncaHHoe
H3o6paXeHne H3ByK, POnDCOEaHnHB THe3do
AUDIO/VIDEO K TeLEBn3opy.
3aHncaHbIy 3ByK He pa3daetcyepe3
akCyCTuYeCKyo CnCTemy. PpOBepbTe 3ByK c
POMOuBIO TeLEBn30paA INI rONOBhIX TeLeFOHOB.

Connecting the microphone with the intelligent accessory shoe

Dubbing with the built-in microphones

No connection is necessary.

Note

The picture is not output from the AUDIO/VIDEO jack. Check the recorded picture on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, as well as check the recorded sound by using a speaker or headphones.

Adding an audio sound on a recorded tape

(1) Insert your recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2) Set the POWER switch of your camcorder to PLAYER.
(3)Locate the recording start point by pressing. . Then press 1 at the point where you want to start recording to set your camcorder to playback pause mode.
(4) Press AUDIO DUB on the Remote Commander.
(5) Press on the Remote Commander and at the same time start playing back the audio you want to record. The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback.
(6) Press on the Remote Commander at the point where you want to stop recording.

Monitoring the new recorded sound

To play back the sound

Adjust the balance between the original sound (ST1) and the new sound (ST2) by selecting AUDIO MIX in the MENU settings (p. 87).

Aydnope3anncb

Ipepe3aHcB c NOMOsbU BCTpoEHHO MKNpOfoHa

Hikakne noDCoeDHeHHn He Tpe6yOTcA.

PpimeyaHne

CirHnAbI N3o6paXeHn He 6yUyt NOCTynaTb OT rHe3da AUDIO/VIDEO. IpOBePraTe 3aINCbIAEMo N3o6paXeHne Ha 3KpaHe JKKd INI B BNDOCKaTEle, a 3aINCbIAeMbn 3Byk InpOBePraTe CnOJIb3OBAHNm DInHaMNka INI rONOBHX TeLEFOHOB.

KoHTpoJIb HOBOrO 3aIncaHHoro 3ByKa

Длвьоспpon3BeDEнгЯ 3Byka

Отergyларуге баланс мекду нрьогаальбим 3ыков (ST1) и Новим 3ыков (ST2), Вьбав Команду AUDIO MIXВ усанвкax MENU (ctp. 87).

Five minutes after when you disconnect the power source or remove the battery pack, the setting of AUDIO MIX returns to the original sound (ST1) only. The factory setting is original sound only.

Notes

• New sound cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the 16-bit mode (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) (p. 91).
• When an external microphone is not connected, the recording will be made through the built-in microphone of your camcorder.
• New sound cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the LP mode.
• You cannot add audio with the AV OUT nor DV OUT jack.

If you make all the connections

The audio input to be recorded will take precedence over others in the following order.

• MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack
• Intelligent accessory shoe
  Built-in microphone

If the A/V connecting cable or i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) is connected to your camcorder

You cannot add a sound to a recorded tape.

To add new sound more precisely

Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point where you want to stop recording later in the playback mode.

Carry out steps 3 to 5. Recording automatically stops at the point where ZERO SET MEMORY was pressed.

We recommend you to add new sound on a tape recorded with your camcorder

If you add new sound on a tape recorded with another camcorder (including DCR-TRV8E/

TRV10E), the sound quality may become worse.

Aydnopepe3anncb

Yepe3 nIaTb MmHyT nOcNe OTCoeDInHeHn INCTOChnKa PNTAHnY mIN CHaTHnB 6aTaapeHOrO 6JOKa yCTaHOBKa AUDIO MIX BepHeTcK K nepBOHaauhOMy 3BykU (ST1).3aBoDcKO YCTaHOBKO RAJIeTcTOJIbKO nepBOHaauhBbHbM 3ByK.

PpimueaHn

• HOBBI 3ByK He MoKeT 6bIb 3aIncan Ha IeHTy, yXe 3aIncanHHyB V 16-6ntOBom peXmE (32 KΓU, 44,1 KΓU nIIIN 48 KΓU) (cTp. 96).
• Ecnn BHeHnMnKpOPOH He NoDCoEINHeN, 3aIncb 6yTeBbInOnHeHa Uepe3 BCtPoEHbIn MnkpoP0He BaWeBnDeOkamepbl.
• HOBBI 3BYK He MoXeT 6bITb 3aIncAH haJeHTy, yXe 3aIncAHHyO B pexkme LP.
• Bы He можete Быногнть наложене 3Byka, Испальзуг rHe3do AV OUT nIи rHe3do DV OUT.

EcnBbCpeJannBce noDcoeHHeHn

BxOJHON 3ByK dIy 3aIncn 6yJeT IMeTb npInopNTeT HaI dpyrMn 3Bykamn B CNeDyUoSei nocJeDoBaTeJIbHOCTN.

Bbl He cMOxKeTe IobaBnTb 3ByK Ha 3ancaHHyIO JENTy.

Дяболг TeUHorO IO6aBNeHЯ HOBOrO 3Byka

HajmTe KhoNky ZERO SET MEMORY B MeCTe, rIe Bbl xoTne 3aInc b no3xe B peXnme BocpOn3BeDeHn.

BbINOHNTE nyHKtbi c 3 no 5.3anncb abTomatueckn octaHOBNTc B MeTe, rde 6blna Hxkata Khonka ZERO SET MEMORY.

PekomeHnyeTcdo6abTb HOBbI 3ByK HaJeHTy,3aIncaHHyo c nOmoBIO BaWei BnDeOKaMepbl

Ecni Bby IobabNTe 3Byk Ha IneHTy, 3aIncanHyIO C NOMOJIbO DpyrO BnDEOkamepbl (BKNIOUaY DCR-TRV8E/TRV10E), KaueCTBO 3Byka MoXeT 6bITb xxke.

Superimposing a title

CM only

If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can superimpose the title while recording or after recording. When you play back the tape, the title is displayed for five seconds from the point where you superimposed it.

You can select one of eight preset titles and two custom titles (p. 83). You can also select the colour, size and position of titles.

HanoxeHne TnTpa

CM only

EcIn BbI nCnOJb3yeTeJeHTy c KACCtHoi nAmrTbHO, Bbl MoKeTe BblIOJIHb HAnOxHeHne TITpa BO BpeMa 3aIncn nnnoce 3aIncn. EcIn Bbl BOCpOn3BOoNte JeHTy, TITp 6yDet OTo6paXaTbcR B TeueHne nTn CeKHyD C TORo MeCTa, rDe Bbl HAnOxnn erO.

BbMOxKeTe Bb6paTb OINH N3 BOcBMn
IpeBaPnteJIbHO yCTaHOBJIeHHbIX TITPOB IN
DbYX Co6CTBeHHbIX TITPOB (Ctp. 83). Bbl MOxKeTe TaKke Bbl6paTb CbET, pa3Mep IN
NoJIOXeHne TITPOB.

(1) Press TITLE to display the title menu.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial. The title is flashing.
(4) Change the colour, size, or position, if necessary.

① Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the colour, size, or position, then press the dial. The item appears.
② Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial.
③ Repeat steps ① and ② until the title is laid out as desired.

(5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting.

In the playback, playback pause or recording mode:

The "TITLE SAVE" indicator appears on the screen for 5 seconds and the title is set.

In the standby mode:

The "TITLE" indicator appears. And when you press START/STOP to start recording, "TITLE SAVE" appears on the screen for 5 seconds and the title is set.

(1)HaKmTe KhoNky TITLE dIra OTo6paXeHn MEHIO TITPOB.
(2)Повернite ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЛЯ Вьбopa установский, a 3aTeM нахмITE ДИСК.
(3)ПовернITE днСEL/PUSH EXEC дЯ Быбopa hyжно TИТра,а 3aTeM haЖмпЕ dнСК.ТИТр haЧНТ MИrTaTb.
(4)Измени TeцBet, pa3mepил пооженп.TnTpа, ecInн hyxHo.

① ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДИВыбopa цьета, размера плноюжени.TИТра, a 3aTeM НAZMITE ДИСК.
② ПовернITE диck SEL/PUSH EXEC дя Выбoga hyжно пункta, a 3aTeM НжмITE диck.
③ Повторгейtenунковы ①и ② do tex nop, noka TnTp He bydET paCnoIOnKeH TaK, KaK HUxKHO.

(5)HaxmTeДиСKSEL/PUSH EXECДЯ 3aBepSeHnYcTaHOBKn.

B pexime Bocnpo3BeDeHn, nay3bl Bocnpo3BeDeHn nIIN 3aInci: Ha 3kpahe IIOBNTcN INIINkaTOp "TITLE SAVE" Na IANTb cekyHd, n ycTaHOBKa TITPa 6yDet 3aBepseHa.

B pexime oXnidaHn: IoAHTcI INndkaTOp "TITLE".Aecn Bbl NaJMeTe KhoNky START/STOP nHaayala 3aIncn,Ha 3KpaHe NOBHTcI INndkaTOp "TITLE SAVE" Ha nptb cekyHn, n yctaHOBka TITpTa 6ydet 3aBepSeHa.

If you use a cassette set to prevent accidental erasure

You cannot superimpose or erase the title. Slide the write-protect tab so that the red portion is not visible.

To use the custom title

If you want to use the custom title, select in step 2.

If you have not made any custom title,

"---..." appears on the display.

Title setting

• The title colour changes as follows: WHITE YELLOW VIOLET RED CYAN GREEN BLUE
• The title size changes as follows :

SMALL LARGE

If you input 13 characters or more for a LARGE title, the title is automatically reduced in size after its position is set.

• The title position changes as follows :

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

The larger the position number, the lower the title is positioned.

When you select the title size "LARGE", you cannot choose position 9.

One cassette can have up to about 26 titles, if one title consists of 5 characters

However, if the cassette memory is full with date, photo and cassette label data, one cassette can have only up to about 15 titles with 5 characters each.

Cassette memory capacity is as follows:

• 6 date data (maximum)
• 12 photo data (maximum)
• 1 cassette label (maximum)

PnncnoIb3OBAHnn KaccetbI C yctaHOBkoJ DnI npedotBpaueHH CNyauHoro CTupaHH

BbI He CMOXeTe BbINONHtB HaIOXeHne IIN CTnpaHne TnTpa. IpeEaBHte JeNecTOK dIpyeOeTbPaueHn E CtnpaHn 3aNNc, TaK YTObI He bblna BnDa KaPachn YaCTb.

IINCNOB3OBAHNA CO6CTBEHNHO TNTpa

EcnBbXOTNE NcIOJIb3OBAb Tbco6CTBeHHbI TnTp, Bbl6epNTe yCTaHOBky B nyHKte 2.

EcnBbHe cdeIaHnHKaKOro co6CTBeHHoro TnTpA,Ha dncJIee NOBbTc HdNKaIy

“- - - - ...”

YctaHOBka TnTpa

LBeT TnTpA n3MeHReTcA CNeDyUOuIM 06pa3OM:

WHITE (6eBbI) YELLOW (XeNTbI)

VIOLET (ΦnOJIeTOBbI) ↔ RED (KpaChbI)

(1) Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLEERASE, then press the dial. Title erase display appears.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the title you want to erase, then press the dial. "ERASE OK?" indicator appears.
(6) Make sure the title is the one you want to erase, and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE, then press the dial.

CTnpaHne TnTpa

(1)Установпейразковая对外开放 POWER в положене PLAYER.
(2)HaKmTe KhoNky MENU nIa oTo6paKeHn MeHIO.
(3)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДИВБОGA yCTaHOBK n, a 3aTeM haxmITEДИСК.
(4)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЯ Быбopa установки TITLE ERASE, a 3aTeM НжмITE ДИСК.

IIOBNTcHnDnKaunCTnpaHnTtPa.

You can make up to two titles and store them in the cassette memory. Each title can have up to 20 characters.

(1) Press TITLE in the standby or PLAYER mode.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the first line (CUSTOM1) or second line (CUSTOM2), then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the dial.
(6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have selected all characters and completed the title.
(7) To finish making your own titles, turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial. The title is stored in memory.
(8) Press TITLE to make the title menu disappear.

CM only

BbMOKTe COCTaBHT Do DByx TnTPOB IN COXPAHHT Nx B KACCETHOI NaMRTN. KaKdYbTnTp MOKET CoepKaTaB Do 20 CmBOJOB.

(1)HaxmTe KhONkY TITLE B pexnme Oxndanu nn pexnme PLAYER.
(2)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДИР Быбopa усановский, a за tem нажмпес.
(3)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЛЯ Вьбор петовский CUSTOM1) Или Втору строчи(CUSTOM2),а за тем HAXKMTE DMCK.
(4)Поверн'te ДИС KELPUSH EXEC ДЯ БИБОРа КОЛОнКИС HУЖБИМ CIMMOBJOM, a 3aTeM HAKMTE ДИСК.
(5)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДИВьбора HYЖНО ВИМБOLA, a 3aTeM HAZKMITEДИСК.
(6) NOBTOPAITyeNYHKTbI 4N5doTexnop, NOKA BBy He BbIeBepNTBe CmMBOJIbI IN NOJHOCTbIO HE COCTABITNE THTp.
(7)ДЯЗавершени COCTaBNeHnA CBOUX co6CTBeHHbIX TnTPOB NOBepHNTe DnCK SEL/ PUSH EXEC ДЯ Bblbopa KOMaHdBi [SET], a 3aTeM haxmite DnCK. TnTp 6yDet CoXpaHe H nAMrTu.
(8)HaxMnte KhoNky TITLE, YTo6bI Ncye3JIO MEHIO TnTPOB.

2

3

4 6

1

2

3

4

To change a title you have stored

In step 3, select CUSTOM1 or CUSTOM2, depending on which title you want to change, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [<], then press the dial to delete the title. The last character is erased. Enter the new title as desired.

If you take 5 minutes or longer to enter characters in the standby mode while a cassette is in your camcorder

The power automatically goes off. The characters you have entered remain stored in memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF once and then to CAMERA again, then proceed from step 1. We recommend setting the POWER switch to PLAYER or removing the cassette so that your camcorder does not automatically turn off while you are entering title characters.

To delete the title

Select [ · ] . The last character is erased.

IIN3MeHeHH COxpaHeHHoro B nAMrTn TnTp a

B nyHKe 3 BbI6epnte yctaHOBky CUSTOM1 nIN CUSTOM2, B 3aBnCIMoCTn OT TnTpa, KOtOpbl Bby XOTnTe N3MeHNb, a 3aTeM haxmTe DnCK SEL/PUSH EXEC. IOBepHnTe DnCK SEL/PUSH EXEC dNBAbOpa yCTaHOBKn [<], a 3aTeM haxmTe DnCK dNlaJeHnA TnTpa. PocneHn CMBOJ 6ydt CTepT. BBeDnTe HOBb HxKbH TnTp.

EcIn Bbl BBOUNTE CNMBONJI 5 MNHT NNI 6OJIeBpeKIMe OXnDaHnB TO BpEmr, KOrda kacceta HaxoNTcB BaWei BNDeOKaMepe

Питainede ВьклочиаabTomatuchekn.CmBoNbl, KOTopbIe Bbl BBelen, coxpaHrTcBnamTn Bvdeokamepbl.YCTaHOBInTe Chauana nepeKlnoaTeJIb POWERB nOLOXeHne OFF,a 3aTeM CHOBA bNoLOXeHne CAMERA,a 3aTeM NaHHNTc CnyHKTa1.PekOMeHdyeTcYcTaHOBt nepeKlnoaTeJIb POWER B noLOXeHne PLAYER mINn BvHyTB kaccety, YTO6bl Ba7a Bvdeokamepa ABTomatucheKn He BvIKLIOUaJacb BO Bpemra BBOda CmBOJOB TITpa.

Дя удалини титра

Bb6epnte yctahOBky [].IocneHn CmBON 6ydet ctept.

CM only

If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can label a cassette. The label can consist of up to 10 characters and is stored in cassette memory. When you insert the labeled cassette and turn the power on, the label is displayed on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder, or on the TV screen.

(1) Insert the cassette you want to label.
(2) Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
(3) Press MENU to make the menu display appear.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select 30 , then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE TITLE, then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character, then press the dial.
(7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the dial.
(8) Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you finish the label.
(9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial.

The label is stored in memory.

Mapknipobka kaccetbl

CM only

Ecnn Bblncnlo3yeTeJeHTy c
kaccetHOI nAMrTbIO,BblMOXeTe
BblIOHNHTb MapKINPOBY KACCETbI.
MapKINPOBka MOxET COCToRb 13 10
CmBOJIOB IN XpaHNTcB N pAmrTn
kaccetbl.EcnBblBCTaBtNE KACCETy C
MapKINPOBko IN BKIOUHTe NTaHHe,TO
MapKINPOBka 6yDet OTo6paxKeHa Ha
3KpaHe JKKD,B BVIOuCKaTeNe IIn Ha
3KpaHe TJIeBUN3Opa.

To erase a character

In step 6 turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [ ] , then press the dial. The last character is erased.

To change the label you have made

Insert the cassette to change the label, and operate in the same way to make a new label.

If you use a cassette set to prevent accidental erasure

You cannot label it. Slide the write-protect tab so that the red portion is not visible.

If the ^H mark appears in step 5

The cassette memory is full. If you erase the title in the cassette, you can label it.

If you have superimposed titles in the cassette When the label is displayed, up to 4 titles also appear.

When the "-----" indicator has fewer than 10 spaces

The cassette memory is full.

The "-----" indicates the number of characters you can select for the label.

Длг STираннсмьола

BnyHKTe 6NoBepHnTe DNCK SEL/PUSH EXECДЯ BbIbOpa yCTaHOBKn [←], a3aTeM haxMnTeДИСК. Пocnédнi CmBBoN 6byet CTePT.

EcIn BbI nCnoJIb3yTe KaccTeY c yCTaHOBko 3aunTbI OT CnyauHoro CTnpaHn

BbI He cMOXeTe BbIOnHnTb MapKnipOBKy KaccTebl. IpeEaBnHbTe JIeNecTOK 3aunTbI 3aINcI, TaK YTObI Kpachna YacTb erO bbla He BnDHa.

EcInBnyHKTe 5 noBNTca 3nak

KacceTha namTb nepenOnHeHa. EcnBbl cOTpeTe TnTp Ha KaccTe, Bbl MoKeTe BblONHtB MapKnIpOBky KaccTebl.

EcIn Bbl BbIOpHnI HAnOKeHne TITPOB Ha Kaccete

Korda noBnTcMapKnipOBka, noBbTcTaKKe do 4 TnTPOB.

EcInnHdNkaTop "----" MeeTe MeHee 10 npo6eIOB

Kaccetna namrTb nepenolHeHa.

ИндикатOP----"уka3bIBAeT KOJIuYeCTBO CmBOnOB, KOTOpoe Bbl MoXeTe Bbl6paTbДлмарКИрВКИ.

- Customizing Your Camcorder - Changing the MENU settings

To change the mode settings in the MENU settings, select the menu items with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The factory settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon, then the menu item and then the mode.

(1) In the standby or PLAYER mode, press MENU.
(2)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired icon, then press the dial to set.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial to set.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, and press the dial to set.
(5) If you want to change other items, select RRETURN and press the dial, then repeat steps from 2 to 4.

For details, see "Selecting the mode setting of each item" (p. 88).

• BbInonJIHeHne HnDnBnDyaIbHbIX yCTaHOBOK Ha BnDEoKamepe -

Menu items are displayed as the following icons:

MANUAL SET
CAMERA SET
PLAYER SET
LCD/VF SET
MEMORY SET (DCR-TRV10E only)
CM SET
TAPE SET
SETUP MENU
ETC OTHERS

M MANUAL SET
CAMERA SET
PLAYER SET
LCD/VF SET
MEMORY SET (Tolbko mojeNB DCR-TRV10E)
CM SET
TAPE SET
SETUP MENU
ETC OTHERS

English

Selecting the mode setting of each item is the factory setting.

Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch.

Icon/item	Mode	Meaning	POWER switch
P EFFECT		To add special effects like those in films or on the TV to images (p. 49)	CAMERA PLAYER
WHT BAL		To adjust the white balance (p. 54)	CAMERA MEMORY
AUTO SHTR	● ON	To automatically activate the electronic shutter when shooting in bright conditions	CAMERA MEMORY
	OFF	To not automatically activate the electronic shutter even when shooting in bright conditions
D ZOOM	ON	To activate digital zoom. More than 10× to 40× zoom is performed digitally (p. 24)	CAMERA MEMORY
	● OFF	To deactivate digital zoom. Up to 10× zoom is carried out.
16:9WIDE	● OFF	—	CAMERA
	ON	To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 44)
STEADYSHOT	● ON	To compensate for camera-shake	CAMERA MEMORY
	OFF	To cancel the SteadyShot function. Natural pictures are produced when shooting a stationary object with a tripod.
N.S. LIGHT	● ON	To use the NightShot Light function (p. 28)	CAMERA MEMORY
	OFF	To cancel the NightShot Light function

Notes on the SteadyShot function

• The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake.
• Attachment of a conversion lens (not supplied) may influence the SteadyShot function.

If you cancel the SteadyShot function

The SteadyShot off indicator "W" appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive compensation for camera-shake.

Icon/item	Mode	Meaning	POWER switch
HiFi SOUND	●STEREO	To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track tape with main and sub sound	PLAYER
	1	To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or a dual sound tape with main sound
	2	To play back a stereo tape with the right sound or a dual sound track tape with sub sound
AUDIO MIX		To adjust the balance between the stereo 1 and stereo 2 (p. 77)	PLAYER
		ST1 ST2
NTSC PB	●ON PAL TV	To playback a tape recorded on your camcorder on a PAL system TV	PLAYER
	NTSC 4.43	To playback a tape recorded in the NTSC colour system on a TV with the NTSC 4.43 mode
LCD B. L.	●BRT NORMAL	To set the brightness on the LCD screen normal	PLAYER
	BRIGHT	To brighten the LCD screen	CAMERA MEMORY
LCD COLOUR		To adjust the colour on the LCD screen, turn and press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial	PLAYER
		To lighten To darken	CAMERA MEMORY
VF BRIGHT		To adjust the brightness on the viewfinder screen, turn and press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial	PLAYER
		To darken To lighten	CAMERA MEMORY

Note on AUDIO MIX

When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance.

Note on the playback of the NTSC tapes

When you play back a tape on a Multi System TV, select the best mode while viewing the picture on the TV.

Notes on LCD B.L.

• When you select "BRIGHT", battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during recording.
• When you use power sources other than the battery pack, "BRIGHT" is automatically selected.

Icon/item	Mode	Meaning	POWER switch
CONTINUOUS (DCR-TRV10E only)	● OFF	Not to record continuously	MEMORY
	ON	To record 3 or 4 pictures continuously (p. 107)
	MULTI SCRN	To record 9 picutures continuously (p. 107)
QUALITY (DCR-TRV10E only)	● FINE	To record still pictures in the fine image quality mode, using the Memory Stick	PLAYER MEMORY
	STANDARD	To record still pictures in the standard image quality mode, using the Memory Stick
FLD./FRAME (DCR-TRV10E only)	● FIELD	To record moving subjects	MEMORY
	FRAME	To record stopping subjects in high quality
PRINT MARK (DCR-TRV10E only)	ON	To write a print mark on the recorded still images you want to print out later	PLAYER MEMORY
	● OFF	Not to write print marks on still pictures
PROTECT (DCR-TRV10E only)	ON	To protect selected still pictures against accidental erasure (p. 121)	PLAYER MEMORY
	● OFF	Not to protect still pictures
SLIDE SHOW (DCR-TRV10E only)		To play back images in a continuous loop (p. 127)	MEMORY
DELETE ALL (DCR-TRV10E only)		To delete all the images (p. 124)	MEMORY
FORMAT (DCR-TRV10E only)		To format Memory Sticks	MEMORY
PHOTO SAVE (DCR-TRV10E only)		To duplicate still pictures (p. 112)	PLAYER
CM SEARCH	● ON	To search using cassette memory (p. 66)	PLAYER
	OFF	To search without using cassette memory
TITLEERASE		To erase the title you have superimposed (p. 82)	PLAYER CAMERA
TITLE DSPL	● ON	To display the title you have superimposed	PLAYER
	OFF	Not to display the title
TAPE TITLE		To label a cassette (p. 85)	PLAYER CAMERA
ERASE ALL		To erase all the data in cassette memory	PLAYER CAMERA
REC MODE	●SP	To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode	CAMERA
	LP	To increase the recording time to 1.5 times the SP mode
AUDIO MODE	●12BIT	To record in the 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds)	PLAYER CAMERA
	16BIT	To record in the 16-bit mode (the one stereo sound with high quality)
REMAIN	●AUTO	To display the remaining tape bar: •for about 8 seconds after your camcorder is turned on and calculates the remaining amount of tape •for about 8 seconds after a cassette is inserted and your camcorder calculates the remaining amount of tape •for about 8 seconds after ▲ is pressed in PLAYER mode •for about 8 seconds after DISPLAY is pressed to display the screen indicators •for the period of tape rewinding, forwarding or picture search in the PLAYER mode	PLAYER CAMERA
	ON	To always display the remaining tape indicator
DATA CODE	●DATE/CAM	To display date, time and various settings during playback	PLAYER
	DATE	To display date and time during playback

Notes on the LP mode

• When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing the tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders or VCRs, noise may occur in pictures or sound.
• When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/Master mini DV cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder.
• You cannot make audio dubbing on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode for the tape to be audio dubbed.
• When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in the LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly between scenes.

Notes on AUDIO MODE

• You cannot dub audio sound on a tape recorded in the 16BIT mode.
• When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance in AUDIO MIX.

Icon/item	Mode	Meaning	POWER switch
CLOCK SET		To reset the date or time (p. 98)	CAMERA MEMORY
LTR SIZE	●NORMAL	To display selected menu items in normal size	PLAYER CAMERA MEMORY
	2×	To display selected menu items at twice the normal size
DEMO MODE	●ON	To make the demonstration appear	CAMERA
	OFF	To cancel the demonstration mode
ETC WORLD TIME		To set the clock to the local time. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to set a time difference. The clock changes by the time difference you set here. If you set the time difference to 0, the clock returns to the originally set time.	CAMERA MEMORY
BEEP	●MELODY	To output the melody when you start/stop recording or when an unusual condition occurs on your camcorder	PLAYER CAMERA MEMORY
	NORMAL	To output the beep instead of the melody
	OFF	To cancel the melody and beep sound
COMMANDER	●ON	To activate the Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder	PLAYER CAMERA MEMORY
	OFF	To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid remote control misoperation caused by other VCR's remote control
DISPLAY	●LCD	To show the display on the LCD screen and viewfinder	PLAYER CAMERA MEMORY
	V-OUT/LCD	To show the display on the TV screen, LCD screen and viewfinder
REC LAMP	●ON	To light up the camera recording lamp at the front of your camcorder	CAMERA MEMORY
	OFF	To turn the camera recording lamp off so that the subject is not aware of the recording
DV EDITING (DCR-TRV10E only)		To duplicate the desired portion on a tape by simply selecting the scenes to edit, using other equipment connected with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (p. 74)	PLAYER

Notes on DEMO MODE

• You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette is inserted in your camcorder.
• DEMO MODE is set to STBY (Standby) at the factory and the demonstration starts about 10 minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a cassette inserted.

Note that you cannot select STBY of DEMO MODE in the MENU settings.

• When NIGHTSHOT is set to ON, the NIGHTSHOT indicator appears in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen and you cannot select DEMO MODE in the MENU settings.

In more than 5 minutes after removing the power source

The "AUDIO MIX", "COMMANDER" and "HiFi SOUND" items are returned to their factory settings.

The other menu items are held in memory even when the battery is removed.

Pysckn

Bb6op yctaHOBOK peXIMa no KaXdOMy NyHKTy 3aBOcKaYcTaHOBka.

IyHKtbl MeHIO OTJNUaOTcB 3aBnCmOCTN OT nIoXeHn IpeKJIouaTeTn POWER.

Resetting the date and time

IpeyeCTaHOBKa DaTbI N BpemeHn

The clock is set at the factory to London time for United Kingdom to Paris time for the other European countries.

If you do not use your camcorder for about a half year, the date and time settings may be released (bars may appear) because the vanadium-lithium battery installed in your camcorder will have been discharged.

First, set the year, then the month, the day, the hour and then the minute.

(1) While your camcorder is in the standby mode, press MENU to display the MENU settings.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select 一 then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CLOCK SET, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the desired year, then press the dial.
(5) Set the month, day and hour by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial.
(6) Set the minute by turning the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial by the time signal. The clock starts to move.
(7) Press MENU to make the MENU settings disappear.

YacbI yCTaHOBJIeHbI Ha IpeInpTmN-
n3ROTOBHTeNe Ha BpemI LoHDoHa dIy MoDeJeI
CoeHNHeHOrO KoponeBcTBa I Ha BpemI
PapNka dIydpurnx Ebponecknx MoDeJeI.
Ecni BbI He Icnpolb30BaIIi BaUy BInDeokamepy OKOJI NOIpyoJa, YCTaHOBKn DaTbI N BpeMeHn MOrYt NCHe3HyTb (NORBAITcR cepTOckn), NocKoiBky BaHaJneBO-NItNeBaa 6aTaapeKa, ycTaHOBJIeHHa B BaWei BInDeokamepe, pa3pIaNTcra.
Chauana yctaHOBNTe rO, 3aTeM MeCra, DeHb, Yac n MNHyTy.
(1)В рекиme Oжндань ВдоКамеры ножмITE Кногку MENU до отбрахену установК MENU.
(2)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЯ Выбoga ИнДИКаци n, a 3aTeM нажмITE ДИСК.
(3)ПовернITE диСК SEL/PUSH EXEC дя Вьбopa команды CLOCK SET, a 3aTeM нажмпг диСК.
(4)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДИВБОпа НЖНО ГДа, a 3aTeM наЖМЛТЕ ДИСК.
(5)Установские месу,.Deнь уас пуtem Врашени диска SEL/PUSH EXECи Нжимани дисka.
(6)YCTaHOBtE MmHyTu Nytem BpaSeHnA DnCKa SEL/PUSH EXEC u HaxkImaHn DnCKa B MOMeHT npeJaHu CnHnA ToHOrO BpEmEH.NacbHaHcyf yHKsIOHnIPoBaTb.
(7)Haxmte KhoNky MENUДЯТOrO,УTO6blncye3n yCTaHOBKn MENU.

The year changes as follows:

Iod n3mehreTc cIeDyUoHm 6bpa30m:

If you do not set the date and time

“--:---” is recorded on the tape and the

Memory Stick (DCR-TRV10E only).

Note on the time indicator

The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 24-hour cycle.

Ecnn BbI He yctaHOBnTe DaTy N BpeMa

Ha IeHTe nI pIaTe IamrTm Memory Stick

(ToIbKO MoIeJI BDCR-TRV10E) 6yIeT 3aIncaHa

HnDnKaun“------”

PpIMeuaHne no HnDkaTOpy BpeMeHn

BcTpoEHHbIe YacBi BaIeI BnDeOkamepbl pa6oTaIO T 24-YacOBOM pexKIme.

- Memory Stick operations - Using a Memory Stick-introduction

- DCR-TRV10E only

You can record and play back still images on a Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder. You can easily play back, re-record or delete still images. You can also record images from a mini DV tape on a Memory Stick or vice versa. You can exchange image data with other equipment such as a personal computer etc., using the Serial port adaptor for Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder or MSAC-PC1 PC card adaptor for Memory Stick (not supplied).

Still images

Record the still image on a Memory Stick. Play back the picture with your PC. See page 117 for details.

Using a Memory Stick

When you use a Memory Stick

-Операци c Memory Stick -Исpenьзоване Memory Stick -Вve徳нe

-ToIbKO MoIeJIb DCR-TRV10E

BbMOxKeTe 3aINcBbATb N BOCPOn3BOIDnTb HneOpDVBXKHeIe M3O6paxEHHa MEmory Stick, npnlaeraMoi K BaWei BnDeOkampe. Bbl JERKO MOxKeTe BbIOJHArTb BOCPOn3BeDEHne, nepe3aINCb INn ydaJIeHne HeNoDVBXKbIX n3O6paxEHH.

Kpome 3tix onepaun, Bby TaKke MoKeTe 3aHcBbTaB n3o6paXeHne CJeHTb MmH DV Ha Memory Stick nHn Hao6oPoT. Bby MoKeTe BByIOJIHTb O6MeH DaHHbIX n3o6paXeHne CdpYro annapaTpyo, Tako KaK nepcoHaJIbHbIK KOMNbIOTep I T.n., NcNoJIb3y aDAnTep nocSeIOBaTeJbHO rOpTa dJaMemory Stick, npInaRaem K Baue BnDeokampe nIn npAdanTep PC-Kaprbl MSAC-PC1 dJaMemory Stick (He npInaRaTeC).

HenoDbxKbIe n3o6paKeHHa

3aHnHtE HnoDnBxKHoe n3o6paXeHne Ha
Memory Stck. Bocnpn3BeNte n3o6paXeHne c
nomoUb BaUero nepcoHaBhoro KOMNbTopeA.
IopOboHbIe CBeDeHn npInBeHeHb Ha cTp. 117.

Icnojb3ObaHne Memory Stick EcIn Bbl ncnojb3yete Memory Stick

• You cannot record or erase still images when the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.
• You can format Memory Sticks. You can also protect still images and write print marks on still images in Memory Sticks.
• We recommend backing up important data.
• When the ACCESS lamp is flashing, never remove the Memory Stick.

• Image data may be damaged in the following cases:

• If you remove the Memory Stick or turn the power off when the ACCESS lamp is flashing

• If you use Memory Sticks near magnets or magnet fields such as those of speakers and televisions.

• Bы He можete 3аисьВаТь ИИ CTираТь ненДВМЖНБе 3ОБРХЕнИ, ecIN JENIECTOK Зашть 3лпСин Нa Memory Stick yctановпeн В полжениlock.

• Bby MoXeTe OTfOpMaTnIpOBaTb Memory Sticks. Bby TaKxe MoXeTe 3aunTnTb HEnoDBNXHbIe N3OBpaXeHnI N3aNcTaB 3HaKn IpeaTN Ha HEnoDBNXHbIX N3OBpaXeHnIX C nOMouCbIO Memory Sticks.
• PeKOMeHdyETcB BInONHrTb KOnN BaxHbIX daHHbIX.

• Ecni Mmraet lammoqka ACCESS, HNKoRda He BbHMaTe Memory Stick B 3Ty Bpemr.
  JaHHbIe N3O6paXeHnMOryT 6bITb NOBpeXdHeBb CNeDyUOxN CUYaX:

• EcIbn BblBHynn Memory Stick nnn BbIKJIOUHN NITAHNE B TO BpeM, KOrJa MMraet JAmnoUOKA ACCESS.

• Ecyn Biu nCnoBn3yeTe Memory Sticks Bo3ne NcTOUHNIKOB MaHNIThbIX NOJIe, TaIKX KaK aKyCTUHeCKNe CnCTeMbI u TEJIeBn3Opbl.

On file format (JPEG)

Your camcorder compresses image data in JPEG format (extension .jpg).

Typical image data file name DSC00001.jpg.

Notes

• Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts of the connecting section.
• Stick its label on the labeling position.
• Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to Memory Sticks.
• Do not disassemble or modify Memory Sticks.
• Do not let Memory Sticks get wet.

• Do not use or keep Memory Sticks in locations that are:

• Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun or under the scorching sun
  -Under direct sunlight

• Very humid or subject to corrosive gases
• When you carry or store a Memory Stick, put it in its case.

You do not need to format the Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder

The Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder is already formatted in FAT format. FAT format is the standard format for Memory Sticks and is supported by your camcorder.

Note

Sample images are already recorded on the Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder. All of these sample images will be deleted if you format the Memory Stick.

Memory Sticks formatted on a personal computer

Memory Stick operations on your camcorder cannot be assured if the Memory Stick is formatted on a Windows machine or Macintosh.

Notes on image data compatibility

• Image data files recorded on Memory Sticks by your camcorder conform with the Design Rules for Camera File Systems universal standard established by the JEIDA (Japan Electronic Industry Development Association).
  You cannot play back on your camcorder still images recorded on other equipment (DCRTRV890E/TRV900E, DSC-D700) that does not conform with this universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.)
• If you cannot use a Memory Stick that has been used on other equipment, format the Memory Stick on your camcorder following the steps on page 105. Note that all images on the Memory Stick will be deleted if you format it.

Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

O φopmaTe ΦaJIIOB (JPEG)

BaWa BnDeOkamepa CxImMaet DaHbIe N3o6paXeHnB B foPmT JPEG (c paCUnpeHnem .jpg).

TnHnHoe nMRAaIa DaHHbIX n3o6paXeHnR DSC00001.jpg.

PpmeHn

He pinnacaiitecb MeTJIiueeCKIMN YactAMM INI BaaMM NpIbIaMn K MEtJIiueeCKIM NactAM CoedINHITEnbHbIX CekKNI.
3TNIKETKY cIeIyET pIKNKPeIJIaTb B NO3NIMM MapKnPOBKn.
- He cπuδaβTe, He pοηαιTe u CπiMbHo He TpαCηTe Memory Sticks.
- He pa36paai Te i Ne BnDOn3MeHnTe Memory Sticks.
He DonlyckaIte, YTo6b Myl e StcHOBINIMb BLnAkhIMN.
- He ncpolb3yute n he xpaanite Memory Sticks B mectax:

• Upe3MepHO JxapKHX, HnnpIMep, B npiIapKOBaHHOM NOI cOJIHcEM ABTOMO6HJe, OCO6eHNo IOnIaIcIM COIIHcEM
  -ПОД ПРЯМВIM COЛHEЧHBIM CBETOM
  B-MeCTax OeHb BnAaKbIbx IINy CoOpEgXauInx Koppo3noHNbIe ra3I
  Pnpehocke nIx xpaHem Memory Stick noIOXHTe ee B cyTnp.

Bam He hyxho fopmatnpoBaTb Memory Stick, npnilaraemyu K Baew Bndeokamepe

Memory Stick, npnilaraemKa BaweBnBeokampe, yke OtFopmatnpobawa B fOpMaTe FAT. FAT nBnAETcSTaHdAPThbM fOpMaTOM dNl Memory Sticks n noDepXkBAeTcB AweBnBeokampeoR.

PpimueaHne

Ha npinlaraeMoM K BaSeB BnDeokamepe Memory Stick yxe 3ancaHbI oBa3uI n3o6paxehn. BCE 3TN oBa3auI n3o6paxehn bdyT cTeptbl, eCIN Bbl oTfOpMaTInpye tMemory Stick.

Memory Sticks otΦopMaTnpoBaHbI Ha nepcoHaJIbHOM KOMNbIoTepe

Bce onepaunm c Memory Stick ha Baawe Bndeokamepe He MoryT 6bIb rapaHTnpoBaHb, eCNI Memory Stick otfopmatnpoBaHa ha MaShHe Windows nMacintosh.

Приимеаная К COBMecTUMOCTN ДаHHbIX n3o6paKeHn

-Фаилданньix,зарпсаньie HaMemory Sticks Baшеви Вдоекамеро,удоветоротnpавилamproeКТрOBaHINHAYHIBERCaIbHORO STAHdapTaФанOBБСNTeMДЯ ВдоekAMepbl,yctahOBJIeHOrO JEIDA（Янонckоаccoumaue耶paBHTM3NeKTPROHHО npOMbIuJIeHHOCTN).Вы He moKteTe BOCpON3BODHTBaHae WBIdeOKaMepe HenoDbNKHbIe N306bpKeHnA,3aHiccaHьie Ha dpyroH annapaType (DCR-TRV890E/TRV90OE，DSC-D700)，KOTopar He yduBETbOPrET3OMy YHINBecalbHOMy CTaHdApTy.(STmMoJelenHe npdoAOTcBA H KEOtOpbIX obnaCTrx.)
- EcnBbI He MoKeTte IcNoIb3ObaTb My eMemory Stick, KOTOPa b6JIa IcNoIb3oBaHa Na dpyroI annapaType, OTOfPMAITpyTe MEmory Stck Ha Bauei BIDeOKaMepe, CNEyI pyNkTAM Ha cTaPaHnCe 105. POMHnTE, YTO npI fOpMaTIpOBaHN BCE n3O6paBeHHa H Memory Stck 6byDt cTeptbI.

Memory Stick RNAE TOPROB MApKo KOpnpaunn Sony.

Inserting a Memory Stick

(1) Slide MEMORY OPEN in the direction of the arrow. The Memory Stick compartment opens.
(2) Insert a Memory Stick in as far as it can go with its rounded corner facing up. Then, close the Memory Stick compartment.

YcTaHOBka Memory Stick

(1)Пелевиньт Кноку MEMORY OPEN B Нарравли стрелк.Откpoeсг отсек Для Memory Stick.
(2)BcTaBbTeMemoryStickdoynopa,TakTTo6bICKpyrHnHbIyrol6blnobpaueHBBepx.3aTeMzakpoTeOTceKdNMaMemoryStick.

1

To eject a Memory Stick

Open the Memory Stick compartment in step 1, press MEMORY RELEASE. The Memory Stick comes out.

2

ДлгиИЗВLEЧЕНИЯ Memory Stick

OTkpOte OTCek dIa Memory Stick B nyHKeT 1, HaxMnte KHOkky MEMORY RELEEase. Memory Stick BbIJeT n3 OTcKa.

MEMORY RELEASE

When the ACCESS lamp is lit or flashing Never shake or strike your camcorder. Do not turn the power off, eject a Memory Stick or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data breakdown may occur.

Ecnn Jlamnoka ACCESS ropnt nnn Mmraet

HnKoIa He TpncTe n He CtyuIte No BaWei BnDeokampe. He BbIKUoyaTe NITaHne, He n3BLeKaaiTe Memory Stick n3 OTceKa n He cHmaiTe 6aTapeHbI 6lOk. B npOTNBHom cLyuae DaHHbIe I3O6paXeHnMaOryT 6bITb NOBpeKdHebl.

Selecting image quality mode

You can select image quality mode in still picture recording. If you do not make any selection, the unit automatically records in FINE mode.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the lock is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to make the MENU display appear.
(3)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select QUALITY, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image quality, then press the dial.
(6) Press MENU to erase the menu display.

Bb6oppeKImaKaueCTBa n3o6paXeHn

BbMOxTe Bb6paTb pexIM KaYeCTBa
n3o6paXeHnI npn 3aIncN HEnoDbNkHoRo
n3o6paXeHnI. EcnBb He cDeJaTe HnKaKOrO
Bb6opa, annapat 6yDet ABToMaTneckn
BbIOINrTa 3aInCb B pexmE FINE.

(1)YcTaHOBInTe nepeKInouaTeIb POWER B nOIOXeHne MEMORY. Y6eINTEcb, YTO fNKcaTop yCTaHOBIne yCTaHOBIne B IeBOM (He3aФИКСИРОВAHOM) nOIOXeHnI.
(2)HaxMMTe KhoNky MENU,уTObby HaДиСплee nOBuJaIc bИнДИКaцИЯ MENU.
(3)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЯ Быбopa установки , a 3aTeM нажмITE ДИСК.
(4)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC Ддьбopa установки QUALITY,а затемнite ДИСК.
(5)ПовернITE ДСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЯ Выбoga КЕЛаEMOTO КаЧЕТBA ИЗБрахеня, a 3aTeM НЖМITE ДСК.
(6)HaxmTe KhoNkY MEnU dIa CtnpaHnI INDnKaun MeHIO.

Image quality settings

Setting	Meaning
FINE (FINE)	Use this mode when you want to record high quality images. The image is compressed to about 1/6.
STANDARD (STD)	This is the standard image quality. The image is compressed to about 1/10.

Differences in image quality mode

Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored into memory. The memory capacity allotted to each image varies depending on the selected image quality mode. Details are shown in the table below. (The number of pixels is 640 × 480 , regardless of image quality mode. The data size before compression is about 600~KB .)

Image quality mode	Memory capacity
FINE	About 100 KB
STANDARD	About 60 KB

Approximate number of images you can record on a Memory Stick

The number of images you can record varies depending on which image quality mode you select and the complexity of the subject.

4MB type:

FINE (FINE) 40 images (maximum)

STANDARD (STD) 60 images (maximum)

8MB type:

FINE (FINE) 81 images (maximum)

STANDARD (STD) 122 images (maximum)

16MB type:

FINE (FINE) 164 images (maximum)

STANDARD (STD) 246 images (maximum)

Note

In some cases, changing the image quality mode may not affect the image quality, depending on the types of images you are shooting.

YctaHOBKn KaueCTBa n3O6paXeHn

Установka	ЗнUCHЕНИе
FINE (FINE)	Искользейутоот реким, ecли ВыхOTITE заNICATБ ВыICOKOKачECTВЕНБIE ИЗБРAXECHИЯ. ИЗБРAXECHИЕ сЖИМАЕТСЕnpIMерно до 1/6.
STANDARD (STD)	ЭTO COOTВETСВЕТСТАДAPTHOMY КЧЕСТВИ ИЗБРAXECHИЯ. ИЗБРAXECHИЕ сЖИМАЕТСЕnpIMерно до 1/10.

OTNIUBApeKIMeKaueCTBaN3o6paKeHNA

3aIncahHbIe 13o6paXeHHc CXmAlOTcB B pOpmAT JPEG nepeD coXpAHeHHc MnAHTn. EMcKoCTb nAmTn, BblJeLHeHHa DnJI KAKDOrO 13o6paXeHHc, INMehAETCBA 3aBNCIMOCTN OT Bbl6paHHoro peXkMa KaeeCTBa 13o6paXeHHc. IOpDro6HOCTn CoepXaTcB NpINBeDeHHo HnHexe TabNIue. (KOniYeCTBO 3neMeHTOB 13o6paXeHHc paBHO 640 x480, HeaBACmIO OT OT peXkMa KaeeCTBa 13o6paXeHHc. Pa3Mep nepeD cKaatmE moCocTabniet OKJIO 600 K6.)

Your camcorder can format (initialize) a Memory Stick. If you format a Memory Stick, all data stored in the Memory Stick will be deleted. This function is convenient when you want to delete all data including protected images. New Memory Sticks are already formatted so that formatting is not required for them. Sample images are stored in the supplied Memory Stick. Note that these sample images will be deleted if you format the Memory Stick.

Formatting (initializing) a Memory Stick

(1) Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(2) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the lock is set to the left (unlock) position.
(3) Press MENU to make the MENU display appear.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select FORMAT, then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial again to select OK, then press the dial. The display shows "EXECUTE."
(7) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The display shows "FORMATTING," and formatting procedure begins. When formatting is finished, the display shows "COMPLETE."

Check the contents of the "Memory Stick" before formatting

Note that all data in the "Memory Stick" including protected images will be deleted.

While "FORMATTING" is displayed

Do not turn the POWER switch nor press any button.

Note

You cannot format the "Memory Stick" if the write-protect tab on the "Memory Stick" is set to LOCK.

Исpenьзоване Memory Stick -Вve徳hoe

Baawa Bndeokamepa no3boJHET oTfOpMaTnpoBaTb (pOINHmuaJI3npoBaTb)
Memory Stick. Ipn fOpMaTnpoBAHm Memory
Stick BCE daHhIbe, xpaHmIbe B Memory Stick,
6bytCTeptb. 3Ta cyHKUra RBnAetc
ydo6Ho, ecn BxOTHTe CTepTe BCE daHHBe,
BKNIOaJ 3auuueHHe N3o6paxKeHn.
Hobie Memory Stick yke OTfOpMaTnpoBAHbI,
no3ToMycfOpMaTnpoBAHne dJa Hnx He
Tpe6yEtc.

O6pa3zbln3o6paXeHn xpaHrTcB npinlaraeMm Memory Stick. PmHnIte, yTO 3tN o6pa3zbln3o6paXeHn 6byT cTeptbI, eCIn Bbl oTfOpMaTnpyTe Memory Stick.

He nobopauBaBte BbIKHouateBb SWITCH n He haxmuTe KaKx-JIn60 KhONOK.

PpimueaHn

BbI He CMOXeTe OToFopMaTnpoBaTbMemory Stick,ecINJeNEcTOK3aunTb3aUNCnHa Memory Stick yCTaHOBJIEN BnoLoXeHne LOCK.

Recording still images on Memory Sticks - Memory photo recording

- DCR-TRV10E only

You can select the FIELD or FRAME mode in still picture recording. Your camcorder compensates for camera-shake when recording moving subjects in the FIELD mode. Your camcorder records still images in high quality in the FRAME mode. Select the FIELD or FRAME in the MENU settings (p. 87).

Before operation

Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the lock is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly. The picture freezes and "CAPTURE" appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Recording does not start yet.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on a Memory Stick. Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.

3aHcB HeIOBbXbIX N3O6paXeHn Ha Memory Stick - FOTo3aHcB c COxpaHeHem B PAMrTn

-ToIbKO moIeJIb DCR-TRV10E

BbMoKeTe Bb6paTb peKmFIELD nn FRAME npn 3aIncn HneoDbNxHoro
306paXeHn. Ba7a BnDeOkaMePa KOMpeHcnpyET
noPpArBaHn.npn 3aIncn NDoBnxHbX O6beKTOB B pexMfEILD.Ba7a BnDeOkaMePa
3aIncsblBaet HeNoDVBxHbIe 3o6paXeHn C
BbICOKM KaueCTBOM B peXmME FRAME.
Bb6epnte npHKT FIELD nn FRAME B ycTaHOBkax MENU (ctp.87).

Ipeed hauanom pa6oTbI

BcTaBbTe Memory Stick B BaUy BnDeokamepy.

(1)YcTaHOBInTe NepeKJIIOUaTeJIb POWER B noJIOXeHne MEMORY. Y6eIINTEcb, yTO 2nKcaTOp yCTaHOBJIeB JLeBOM (He3aФNkCINPOBaHHOM) NOJIOXeHm.
(2)ДерхитЕ сlerka нажатой кногку PHOTO.Изобрахене 6bydET "Заморожени", И наэкране XXД nIиВиюнckeTeNe NOЯВNTсУндикага "CAPTURE".Заньпoka He NaЧется.
(3)Haxmnte KhoNky PHOTO cunbhee. H26paKaeHne, OTO6paKaemoe Ha 3KpaHe, 6ydet 3aHnCaHO Ha Memory Stick. 3aHnCb CHTaTe 3aBepseHHoE, eCIn NcYe3Het nepemeuaOuMnC nloCaTbI INDnKaTOP.

1

2
PHOTO

Number of images can be recorded on the Memory Stick/KoJIueCTBO n3O6paXeHn, KoTOpbIe MoXHo 3aIncatb Ha Memory Stick

Number of recorded images/
KoIInueCTBO 3aIncahhbyix n3obpaXeHn

3
PHOTO

Recording still images on Memory Sticks - Memory photo recording

Notes

• When recording fast-moving subjects in the FRAME mode, the recorded image blurry.
• When recording in the FRAME mode, your camcorder may not correct camera-shake. We recommend that you shoot objects with a tripod.

When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY The following functions do not work: wide TV mode, digital effect, picture effect, title.

When you are recording a still image You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO.

When you press the PHOTO button on the Remote Commander Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press the button.

Recording images continuously

You can record still pictures continuously. Select one of the two modes described below before recording.

Continuous mode [a]

You can record 3 or 4 pictures continuously.

Multi screen mode [b]

You can record 9 still pictures continuously on a single page.

[a]

3aNcB HeNoDvXhBix N3o6paKeHn Ha Memory Stick - FOTo3aNcB c COxpaHeHem B namrTu

Примейань

• Пи записьICTpo DBNЖушихСОБъektOBВ ржиме FRAME,ИЗобразенье 6удET pa3MbITbIM.
  -ПиЗлпсВржIMe FRAMEФункцИКOMпЕнcaци ПОдparINbAHЯ BaшЕBnDEOKaMEpbI MoKET pa60TaTb HENpaBnMbHO.PekOMeHДуETcBAblONHATb CbeMky OБьEKTOBC NOMOuTO TpeHOrN.

EcJn NepeKJIIOUaTeIb POWER ycTaHOBNeH B noJIOXeHne MEMORY.

Cneyuouane yhkuHn He pa6oTaIoT: uPOKO3KpaHHb TeNEBUNHHb peXuM, uPpOBoN 3ΦΦeKT, 3ΦΦeKT n3OpaXeHn, TtTp.

EcIn Bbl 3ainncbiBaete HeNoDBHXHoe n3o6paKeHne

BbI He MoXKeTe HN BbIKNoHTb NITaHHe, HN hKaTb KhONKy PHOTO.

EcnBbI haxMeTe PHOTO ha nyIbTe dNCTaHcOnHOro ynpabJIeHHa

Baa Bndeokamepa TOTcAc Ze 3aNIMeT n3o6paXeHne, KOtOpoe 6yDet Ha 3KpaHe npi HaxaTNI KHOKN.

3aHcB n3o6paXeHn HnpepbIBHO

BbIMoKeTe 3aINCbIbTa bN3O6paXeHnA HnepepbIBHO. BbIbepnte OdIn N3 DByxpeXHMOB, ONiCAHHbIX HNXe, nepeD 3aINCbIO.

HenpepbIBHbI pexnM [a]

BbMOxKeTe 3aINcBtB 3 nIN 4 n3OpaXeHn HnpepbIBHO

Mhoro3KpaHHbIpeXIM[b]

BbMOKeTe 3aINcBbAtb 9 HeNoDBNkHbIX n06paXeHn HnpepbIBHO Ha OdHo CTpaHnIe.

[b]

Recording still images on Memory Sticks - Memory photo recording

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the lock is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to make the MENU display appear.
(3)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTINUOUS, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the dial.
(6) Press MENU to erase the menu display.

3aHcB HeNoDvXhBix N3o6paJxHnHaMemoryStick-ΦoTo3aHcBcCOxpaHeHEmBnAMrTu

(1)YcTaHOBInTe nepeKJIIOUaTeIb POWER B NOJIOKeHne MEMORY. Y6eJNTecb, yTO 0nKcaTOp yCtAHOBJIeH B JEBOM (He3aФИКСИРОВАHOM) NOJIOKeHm.
(2)HaxMMTe KhoNkY MENU, YTo6bHa HnCnIe neBnlaScbHnDkaunr MENU.
(3)Повернite ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЯп Вьбopa установки , a 3aTeM нажмITE ДИСК.
(4)Повернite ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДИВьбopa установки CONTINUOUS, a 3aTeMHAKMITE DИСК.
(5)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДИВьбopa кению установки,а затемпсун. <|im_start|>assistant (6)ДИСК.
(6)HaxmTe KhONkY MENU Дд CTирань ИнданкauNi MeHIO.

2,6

3

MEMORY SET
CONTINUOUS
QUALITY
FID/FRAME
PRINTMARK
PROTECT
PROTECT STC.SLIDE.SHOW
SELECT SHOW 2 DELETE ALL
DELETE ALC

( x - 2x) t - xy^2 = ( x - 2x) f^ t

MEMORY

CONTIN

MEMORY SET

CONTINUOL

QUALITY

C

F

D

P

F

S

D

FORMAT

FORMAT

RETUR

IMENU:END

4

MEMORY SET

CONTINUOUS OFF

QALI TY

QUATIY

FLD./FRAME

PRINT MARK

PROTECT

ETC SLIDE SHOW

P DELETE ALL

FORMAT

FORMAL

RETN

CONT1

QUALITY

FLD.LI

PRINT

PROTE

PROTE

ETCSLIDE

DELET

FORMA

FORMA 205TUL

RETURN

5

MEMORY SET

CONTINUOUS ON
QUALITY
QUALITY
FLD./FR
PRINT M
PROTECT
FTSLIDE
DELATE
DELETE
FORMAT
RETURN
[MANUAL:END]

Recording still images on Memory Sticks - Memory photo recording

Continuous shooting settings
Setting	Meaning (indicator on the screen)
OFF	Your camcorder shoots one image at a time. (no indicator)
ON	Your camcorder shoots 3 or 4 still images at about 0.8 sec intervals. ( )
MULTI SCRN	Your camcorder shoots 9 still images at about 0.3 sec intervals and displays the images on a single page divided into 9 boxes. ( )

Number of images in continuous shooting The number of images you can shoot continuously varies depending on the image quality mode.

FINE: 3 images

STANDARD: 4 images

Note on using the video flash light (not supplied)

The video flash light does not work in the continuous or multi screen mode if you install it to the accessory shoe.

3aIncb HeNoDvNkHbIX N3o6paKeHn HaMemoryStick-ΦoTo3aIncb c coXpaHeHemB namrTu

Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image

- DCR-TRV10E only

Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a mini DV tape and record it as a still image on a Memory Stick.

Before operation

Insert a recorded mini DV tape and a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
(2) Press. The picture recorded on the mini DV tape is played back.
(3) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the picture from the mini DV tape freezes. "CAPTURE" appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Recording does not start yet.
(4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on a Memory Stick. Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.

3aHnCb n3o6paXeHnCJIeHTbIMHN DV kaKHeNoDBrXhOrO n3o6paXeHn

-ToIbKO MoIeJIb DCR-TRV10E

BaSHA BnDeOKaMepa MoKet CUnTbIbTaB DaHHbIE NOdBnXHOrO n3o6paXeHnA, 3aNcCaHbIe Ha JeHTe MmH N D V, n 3aNcBbIaB b erO KaK HenoDnXHoe n3o6paXeHne Ha Memory Stick.

Перед наалом pa60ть

BcTaBbTe 3aIncanHyIO JeHtY MmHi DV i Memory Stick B BaUy BuJeokamepy.

(1)Установпейреклочаель POWER в положене PLAYER.
(2)HaXMMTe KHOHKnky ▷. HaYHeTcBBOCpOnI3BeDeHne I3O6paXeHnA, 3aNcAHOrO HaJeHTe MHN DV.
(3)Держпге сlerka нажатой кноку PHOTOdo Text nop, noka n3o6paхене с lentblMnD VNe 6ydeT "zamopoxeHo".HaЗкранЕЖКДИВиBиДОИСКаTeIe NOЯВITcHnДИКaця"CAPTURE".3aIncь nOKa He NaЧNETс.
(4)Haxmnte KhoNky PHOTO cnIbHee. 3o6paKeHne, OTo6paKaemoe Ha 3kpaHe, 6yTe 3aIncAHO Ha Memory Stick. 3aIncB cHTaETc3aBepSeHHo, ecIn NcE3HET nepemeuaOuMnCnPONoCaTbI INDnKaTOp.

Recording an image from a mini DV tape as a still image

When the ACCESS lamp is lit or flashing Never shake or strike the unit. As well do not turn the power off, eject a Memory Stick or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data breakdown may occur.

If " 日 " appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder

An incompatible Memory Stick is inserted. Be sure to use proper Memory Stick.

If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback mode

Your camcorder stops momentarily.

Sound recorded on a mini DV tape
You cannot record the audio from a mini DV tape.

Titles have already recorded on mini DV tapes You cannot record the titles on Memory Sticks. The title does not appear while you are recording a still picture with PHOTO.

3aIncb n3o6paXeHnC JeHTbl MNH DV KAK HenoDbHXHorO n3o6paXeHn

EcInI JAMnOuKa ACCESS ropnt nIIM Muraet HIKoRda He TprcnTe n He cTuynte no Bauei BnDeokampe. TaKke, He BbIKIOUaHte nITaHne, He n3BLekaTe Memory Stick n3 OTceKa n He ChImaTe 6bTaapeHbI 6lOk.B IpOTINBHOM Cnyae daHHbIe N3OBpaXeHnMOryt 6bItb NOBpeXdeHbl.

EcHnHa3KpaHe KKD nIN B VbDOnckaTeNe NOBHTcH INdNkaun "

BCTaBHeHa HeCOBMeCTnMaJMemory Stick.
Y6eIInTeCb, YTO6bI NcNoJIb3ObaIacb
HaIInEkaaJMemory Stick.

EcIn B peKIMe BOCpON3BedeHnCnerKa HaxaTb KhoNkY PHOTO

Baisha Bndeokamepa Ha mHOBeHne OCTaHOBITcR.

3Byk, 3aHcAHHbI Ha JeHTy MmH N DV

BbI He MoXeTe 3aINcBtB 3ByK CJIeHTbl MNH DV

Tntpbl, yxe 3auncaHbIe Ha JeHTbl MMH DV

BbHe MoKxTe 3aNcBbA bTbTtpbHaMemory Sticks.TtTp He NoaBntCBA Bo BpeMraNc HnOaBnXhoro N3o6paXeHn C nmoou KhoNk PHOTO.

Copying still images from a mini DV tape - Photo save

- DCR-TRV10E only

Using the search function, you can automatically take in only still images from mini DV tapes and record them on a Memory Stick in sequence.

Before operation

• Insert a recorded mini DV tape and rewind the tape.
• Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.
(2) Press MENU to make the MENU display appear.
(3)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select then press the dial.
(4)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PHOTO SAVE, then press the dial. "PHOTO BUTTON" appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
(5) Press PHOTO deeper. The still image from the mini DV tape is recorded on a Memory Stick. The number of still images copied is displayed. "END" is displayed when copying is completed.

KoHIpOBaHHe HeNoDBrXhblIX 306paXeHn C JeHTbI MHN DV - CoXpaHeHne B PAMrTn fOToCHmKOB

-ToIbKO MoIeJIb DCR-TRV10E

NcnoIb3yI cyHKnIO nOncKa, Bbl MoKeTe ABOTOMaTIChECKu BBIIOJHrTb FOToCHIMKn TOJIbKO HEnoDBNXHbIX N3O6paXeHm C JeHT MMHN DV n 3aIINCbIBaTb Nx Ha Memory Stick B nocneIOBaTeJIbHOCTN.

Ipeed hauanom pa60tbi

BCTaBbTe 3anncahnyJeHTy MmH DV npeMeToaTe JeHTy.
BcTaBbTe Memory Stick B BaWy BnDeokamepy.

(1)YctaHOBInTe IpeKJIIOUaTeIb POWER B NOJIOKeHne PLAYER.
(2)HaxMMTe KhoNkY MENU, YTo6bHa HnCnIe neBnlaScbHnDkaunr MENU.
(3)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДИЗ ВИБОа установки , a 3aTeM нажмITE ДИСК.
(4)ПовернITE дисK SEL/PUSH EXEC дяВыбoga установки PHOTO SAVE,а затемнITE дис.На ЗкpaneЕЖДилВВдоюпсале повитсгИнданkaцуЯ"PHOTO BUTTON".
(5)HaXMMTe KhoNkY PHOTO cnIbHee. HeoDbnKHoe n3obpaXeHne CJeHTbl MHN DV 6yDet 3aIncAHO HaMemory Stick. ByDet OTobpaXeHO KOINueCTBO HeoDbnKHBix cKoInpOBAHHbIX n3obpaXeHNI. IIO 3aBepWeHNI KOINpOBAHNI Ha DInCnJIeE 6yDet OTobpaXeHNI HdNkaUaN "END".

Copying still images from a mini DV tape - Photo save

To stop copying

Press MENU to stop copying.

When the memory of the Memory Stick is full

"MEMORY FULL" appears on the LCD screen, and the copying stops. Insert another Memory Stick and repeat the procedure from step 2.

When the ACCESS lamp is lit or flashing

Never shake or strike your camcorder. As well do not turn the power off, eject a Memory Stick or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image data breakdown may occur.

To record all the images recorded on the mini DV tape

Rewind the tape all the way back and start copying.

If the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK

"NOT READY" appears when you select the item in the MENU settings.

When you change Memory Sticks in the middle of copying

Your comcorder resumes copying from the last image recorded on the previous Memory Stick.

KoHpOBaHne HnOJDbNkHbIX N3o6paXeHn C JIeHTbl MmH DV - CoXpaHHe B nAmrTn foTOChMkoB

Дл OCTaHOBKи KOnIpyOBaHn

HaxmTe KhoNkY MENU dIaOCTaHOBKn KOINPOBaHn.

B clyuae nepenolneHn Memory Stick

Ha 3KpaHe JKKD noBnTc nHnIkaun "MEMORY FULL", n KOnipOBaHne oCTaHOBnTc. BCTaBbTe dpyrmy Memory Stick n nobTOPnPte npoceDpyc c nyHKta 2.

Ecnn Jiamnoka ACCESS ropnt nnn Mmraet

HnKoIa He TpRcIne n CtUHHe n BaSei BnDeokamepe. TaKke, He BbIKIOuHaTe nITaHne, He BbIHMaIte Memory Stick n3 OTcKa n He ChIMaIte 6bTaapeHbI 6NoK. B npOTnBHom clyae daHHbI e N3O6paXKeHnMOryT 6bItb NOBpeXJeHbl.

ДяЗаин BCex ИЗОБрахжи,ЗИSCaHHbIX NaJIeHTe MInH DV

IpepeMoTaTe IeHTy Do KOHua NaHa3aN HauchnTe KOnPiPoBaHne.

EcIn IeNecToK 3aunTbI 3aHncn HaMemory Stick yctaHOBJIeB bNoLoXeHne LOCK

Viewing a still picture - Memory photo playback

- DCR-TRV10E only

You can play back still images recorded on a Memory Stick. You can also play back 6 images at a time by selecting the index screen.

Before operation

Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or PLAYER. Make sure that the lock is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Slide OPEN in the direction of the mark. Then, open the LCD panel.
(3) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.
(4) Press MEMORY + / - to select the desired still image. To see the previous image, press MEMORY-. To see the next image, press MEMORY+.

BcTaBbTe Memory Stick B BaUy BnDeokamepy.

(1)YcTaHOBInTe NepeKJIIOUaTeIb POWER B noJoxeHne MEMORY nIIN PLAYER. Y6eIInTeCb, yTO cIKCaTOP ycTaHOBJeH B JEBOM (He3aФNKCuPOBaHHOM) noJoxeHn.
(2)Перединьт Кноку OPEN в НаразовниMeTKI 3aTeM OTkpOte paHel JKKI.
(3)Haxmnte KhoNkY MEMORY PLAY. Bydet o76paxeHo nocJeDHee 3aIncanHoe n3o6paxeHne.
(4)HaxmTe KhONky MEMORY + / - Дя Bb6opa hyxHOro HEnOdBxHOrO n3o6paXeHn.ДЯ TORO,уTO6by yBnDeTb npEdyUSee n3o6paXeHne，HaxmTe KhONky MEMORY-.ДЯ TORO,yTO6by yBnDeTb cIeDyUSee n3o6paXeHne，HaxmTe KhONky MEMORY+.

To stop memory photo playback

Press MEMORY PLAY again.

Дл оctahOBKN BOCINpON3BeDEHNA

ΦOTOCHUMKOB 3 NAMRTN

HaxmTe KhoIky MEMORY PLAY eue pa3.

To play back recorded images on a TV screen

• Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder before the operation.
• When operating memory photo playback on a TV or the LCD screen, the image quality may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is as good as ever.
• Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be output from the TV speakers.

Image data modified with personal computers or shot with other equipment

You may not be able to play them back with your camcorder.

Дяв Восчpen3BveDEHЯ 3aINcAHbIX n3o6paXeHn Ha 3kpaHe TelenBn3opa

Ipeed Naalam Bocnpon3BeDnna POnCoeHNHTe Baui BIneOKeMaepy K TeNeBn3opy C NOMoBbIO CoeHNHTeBnHOrO KaEbeAayIO/ BInDeO, pinnaraemoro K Bauei BIndeOKeMape.
- Пи ВOCПОЗИЗБЕДЕНМФОТСИМКOB ИЗ пamRTN нэ Ккале Телевзора ИИЖД КачсТВО ИЗбражehн можетхудштб. 3TO He ВЯЛВETСРЕСПAPBAHOCKТЮ. ДАньгile ИЗбражehн HAXOДТСВ В TOM УС COCTОHRHIM, ΚΑΚΙΝΥΕДZE.
- Пекд Налов ВорсpondЗбения NOВернite peryIЯтгт ромковостп ТелевизORA BHN3, Инчe Чере з Akуctи checkyo CnCTemy MoKeT Nocblшаысь УМ (3aBbBAHne).

DAnHbIe M3O6paXeHnI, BUNOn3MeHeHbIe C NOMOsbIc nepCOHaJIbHOro KOMNbIbTepa IIN CHaTbIe C NOMOsbIO DpyrO annPapatypbI

BbI He CMOXKeTe BOCnPoN3BeCTn INC NOMOuBbBaSei Bvndeokamepbl.

Screen indicators during still image playback

3KpaHbIe HnDnKaTOpbl Bo BpeMBOcnpOn3BeDeHnHeNoDnBxhXnO6paXeHn

Playing back 6 recorded images at a time (index screen)

You can play back 6 recorded images at a time.

This function is especially useful when searching for the highest order

for a particular image.

Bocnpoun3BeHeHne 6 3aIINcaHHbIX N3o6paKeHn OndHOBpeMeHNo (HNeDEKCHbY 3KpaH)

BbMOxTe BOCPON3BcETN 6 3aINcaHHbIX N3O6paXKeHn OJHOBpeMeHNO.

3Ta yHKZIyBnEeTc Oo6eHNO IOne3HO np BbIIOHNHeHNI NONCKa OTDeJIbHbIX I3O6paXeHNI.

MEMORY INDEX

Press MEMORY INDEX.

A red mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to the index screen mode.

Haxmnte KhoNkY MEMORY INDEX.

Kpachar MTeKa NpOBITcH NaI 3O6paXeHHeM, KOTOpoe 6byet OTo6paXaTbCnpeE IN3MeHeHEm pexMinaNDeKCHOrO 3KpaHa.

• To display the following 6 images, keep pressing MEMORY +.
• To display the previous 6 images, keep pressing MEMORY -.

To return to the normal playback screen (single screen)

Press MEMORY + / - to move the mark to the image you want to display on full screen, then press MEMORY PLAY.

Note

When displaying the index screen, the number appears above each image. This indicates the order in which images are recorded on the Memory Stick. These numbers are different from the data file names.

The image quality mode indicator

The indicator may show a mode different to the one in which you recorded. This is not a malfunction. The indicator shows the size of the data file. For instance, if the size of FINE image is small enough, it may be displayed as STD. Or if the size of image is large enough, it may be displayed as SFN.

Files modified with personal computers

These files may not be displayed on the index screen. Image files shot with other equipment may not be displayed on the index screen either.

Viewing the recorded images using a personal computer

The image data recorded with your camcorder is compressed in the JPEG format. If you use the application software, "PictureGear 3.2Lite" supplied with your camcorder, you can see images recorded on a Memory Stick on a computer screen. Use the serial port adaptor for Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder, the MSAKIT-PC4A Memory Stick/PC card kit or MSAC-PC1 card adaptor for Memory Stick (not supplied) for this operation. For detailed instructions on operation, refer to the operating instructions of the serial port adaptor, Memory Stick/PC card kit or PC card adaptor and application software.

PC card adaptor (not supplied)/AДanTeP PC-KapТы (He пилагаert)

Memory Stick

PpocmToT 3aHncaHbIX n3o6paXeHn C NOMOuIOp nepcoHaJIbHOrO KOMNbIOTepa

Superimposing a still picture in a Memory Stick on a moving picture - M. CHROM/M. LUMI/C. CHROM

Haioxehne HenoBnxHoro n3o6paXehnna3 Memory Stick Ha noDbHXHoe n3o6paXehne - M.CHROM/M.LUMI/C.CHROM

- DCR-TRV10E only

You can superimpose a still picture you have recorded on a Memory Stick on top of the moving picture you are recording.

M. CHROM (Memory chroma key)

You can swap a blue area of a still picture such as an illustration or a frame with a moving picture.

M. LUMI (Memory luminance key)

You can swap a brighter area of a still picture such as a handwritten illustration or title with a moving picture. Record a title on a Memory Stick before a trip or event for convenience.

C. CHROM (Camera chroma key)

You can superimpose a moving picture on top of a still picture such as a picture can be used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. The blue area of the moving picture will be swapped with a still picture.

-ToIbKO moIeJIb DCR-TRV10E

BbMOKeTe HaIOKuTb HnOdBnXHoe n3o6paXeHne, 3aIncAHoe Ha Memory Stick, Ha 3aIncBaemoe IOdBnXHoe n3o6paXeHne.

M. CHROM (KHONka LBeTHOCTn NaMATN)

BbMOKeTe MeHrTb MeCTaMn CnHIOU qAcTb HnOdBnXhORo N3O6paXeHnra, TaKOrO KaK pNcYHOK INI KApD, C NOdBnXhblm N3O6paXeHnem.

M. LUMI (KhoNka npKocTn namATn)

BbMOKeTe MeHrTb MeCTAmN 60nee npkyuactb HnOdBnXHO r3o6paXeHn, TaKOrO KaPcCyHOK NIN TnTp, C NOdBnXhBMn3o6paXeHnEM. 3aNiUnTe TnTp HaMemory Stick nepeD Te, KAK OTnpabUTbc BnyteSeCTBne, INI Xe DnY yDo6CTBa.

C. CHROM (KHOIIKA ZBETHOCTN BIVDEOKAMepbl)

BbMOxTe HANOxNtB N0DnXHNOE
N3O6paXeHne Ha BepxHIOU YAcTb
HeNoDBNXHOrO N3O6paXeHNe, HApnPmep
PcCynKa, NcNoIb3yEmoR O KaueCTBe P0Ha.
ChIMnTE o6bekt Ha rOly6om P0He. TOny6a
YacTb NODnXHOrO N3O6paXeHNe 6yDet
3aMeHeHa Ha HeNoDnXHoe N3O6paXeHne.

Superimposing a still picture in a Memory Stick on a moving picture - M. CHROM/M. LUMI/C. CHROM

HaIIOXeHne HEnoDnBxHOrO I3o6paXeHn I3 Memory Stick Ha noDnBxHoe I3o6paXeHne - M.CHROM/M.LUMI/C.CHROM

Before operation

Insert a recorded Memory Stick on your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.
(2) Press MEMORY PLAY in the standby mode. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image.
(3)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial to set. The mode changes as follows: M.CHROM M.LUMI C.CHROM
(4) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The still picture is superimposed on the moving picture.
(5) Press MEMORY + / - to select the still picture you want to superimpose. To see the previous image, press MEMORY-. To see the next image, press MEMORY+.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.
(7) Press START/STOP to start recording.

IpeedHaayanpa60TbI

BcTaBbTeMemoryStickc3aNcBbBaUy BnDeokamepy.

(1)YCTaHOBInTe NepeKJIIOuChaTeIb POWER B noJoxKeHne CAMERA.
(2)HaxmTe KhONky MEMORY PLAY BpeKIme OxuaHn. IocJeHHe 3aIncahHoe nnn CKMOHOBAHHoe 3O6paJxehne IOBNTcB HxKHe Yactn 3KpaHa B BIne KpoxOTHOrO N3O6paXeHNy.
(3)ПовернITE ДСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЯ Быбoga hyхно ржима, a 3aTeM haЖмпЕ ДСК ДЯ BыЮЛОННО YCTAHOBК. Ржим БудET ИЗМенТьс СLEДУЮШМ образом: M.CHROM → M.LUMI → C.CHROM
(4)HAnKMnTe DnCK SEL/PUSH EXEC. HenoDbNkHoe N3o6paXeHne 6yDeT HANOJoxEHO NaODbNkHoe.
(5)Haxmnte KhONky MEMORY+/-ДЯ BbI6opa HEnoDbNxHOrO n3ObpaXeHnRA, KOtOpoe BbXOTNe HAnOxNtB Na NOBnXHoe. ДЯПрOCMToPa npeDbIyUcero n3ObpaXeHnRAxMNTe KhONky MEMORY-. ДЯПрOCMToPa cIedIyUcero n3ObpaXeHnRAxMNTe KhONky MEMORY+.
(6)ПовернITE диСК SEL/PUSH EXEC дяпулmpовки зфразкета.
(7)HaxmTe KhoNky START/STOP nHaayana 3aPiNCi.

Superimposing a still picture in a Memory Stick on a moving picture - M. CHROM/M. LUMI/C. CHROM

Items to adjust

M. CHROM	The colour (blue) scheme of the area in the still picture which is to be swapped with a moving picture
M. LUMI	The colour (bright) scheme of the area in the still picture which is to be swapped with a moving picture
C. CHROM	The colour (blue) scheme of the area in the moving picture which is to be swapped with a still picture

The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect.

To change the still picture to superimpose

Do either of the following:

• Press MEMORY+/-- before step 7.
• Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial before step 7, and repeat the procedure form step 3.

To change the mode setting

Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial before step 7, and repeat the procedure from step 3.

To cancel M. CHROM/M. LUMI/C. CHROM

Press MEMORY PLAY.

The Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder stores 30 images

-For M.CHROM:26 images (such as a frame) DSC00001\~DSC00026
-For C.CHROM:4 images (such as a background)

DSC00027\~DSC00030

Sample images stored before leaving the factory

Sample images are protected (p. 121).

If you format the Memory Stick

Sample images will be deleted.

During recording

You cannot change the mode setting.

HaIooKeHne HenoDbNxHoro I3o6paXeHn I3 Memory Stick Ha IIOBxHoe I3o6paXeHne - M.CHROM/M.LUMI/C.CHROM

IyHKtbI dJIpeRyIpOBKn

IaH3MeHeHH HeNoBuxxHoro 1306paXeHH JaHaIOXeHH

BbInonHnTe Ondo n3 CJeDyUOux DeNCTBn.
-HaKmTe KhONkY MEMORY+/- nepei nyHKTOM 7.
-HaKMTe DNCK SEL/PUSH EXEC nepeI nyHKToM 7 nIOBTopTe npOceDpy c NyHKTa 3.

BbI He MoXKeTe N3MeHrTaYcTaHOBky peKIma.

Preventing accidental erasure - Image protection

- DCR-TRV10E only

To prevent accidental erasure of important images, you can protect selected images.

Before operation

Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

(1) Play back the image you want to protect.
(2) Press MENU to make the MENU display appear.
(3)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PROTECT, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(6) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The "o-n" mark is displayed beside the data file name of the protected image.

Пре dioTbpaaeeHne clyuaHoro CTnpaHn - 3aunTa n3o6paXeHn

-ToIbKO moIeJIb DCR-TRV10E

ДпnpedotBpaueHnCnyaHOrO CTupaHnBaxhblx n3o6paKeHn Bbl moKeTe 3aunTntbBblpaHHbe n3o6paKeHn

Ipeed hauanom pa60tbi

BcTaBbTeMemoryStickB Bauy BnDeokamepy.

(1) Bocnpoun3BeDnTe n3o6paXeHne, KOTOpoe Bbl XOTnTe 3aunTnTb.
(2)HaxMMTe KhoNky MENU,Чтоби на диспee nOBuIacb ИДИКaцЯ MENU.
(3)Повернite ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЯ Быбopa установки , a 3aTeM нахмITE ДИСК.
(4)ПовернITE диСК SEL/PUSH EXEC дя Выбoga установки PROTECT, a 3aTeM нажмITE диСК.
(5)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДИВБОGA yCTaHOBKN ON, a 3aTeM haxmnte DИСК.
(6)HaxMMTe KhoIky MENU dIry cTnpaHnIHdNkaCmMeHIO.Ha IncPnee NOBNTc3HaK“O-praDM C ha3BaHneM paJIlaDaHHbIX 3aUuIeHHoro N3o6paXeHnI.

2,6

3

MEMORY SET

CONTINUOUS

G QUALITY 152415

FLD.7/FRAME PRINT MARK

PRINTMARK

PROTECT SLIDE SHOW

2 DELETE ALL

FORMAT

4

EMORY SET:

CONTINU

QUALITY

FLD.7F

PRINT MARK

PROTE1 OFF 71

SLIDE SHOW

DELETE ALL

FORMAT 205TURNA

RETN MENU:END

MEMORY SET
CONTINUOUS
QUALITY
FLD./FRAME
PRINT MARK
PROTECT
E
DELETEALL
FORMAT
RETURN [MENUL]END

m - 1 0 ;

1

1

10/12□

5

MEMORY SET

CONTINUOUS

QUALITY

FLD./FRAME

PRINTMARK

PROTECT ON

ETC SLIDE SHOW

DELETE ALL

FORMAT

RETURI

Preventing accidental erasure - Image protection

To cancel image protection

Select OFF in step 5, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

Note

Formatting erases all information on the Memory Stick, including the protected image data. Check the contents of the Memory Stick before formatting.

If the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK

You cannot carry out image protection.

BbI He cMOXKeTe BbIIOJIHITb 3aUHTy n3O6paJxehnI.

Writing a print mark - PRINT MARK

3a\Pncb neyaTHbIX 3HaKOB - PRINT MARK

- DCR-TRV10E only

You can specify the recorded still image to print out. This function is useful for printing out still images later.

Your camcorder conforms with the DPOF

(Digital Print Order Format) standard for specifying the still images to print out.

Before operation

Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

(1) Play back the image you want to write a print mark.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.
(3)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select PRINT MARK, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(6) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The " " mark is displayed beside the data file name of the image with a print mark.

2,6
3

MEMORYSET

CONTINUOUS

QUALITY

FLD./FRAME

PRINTMARK

PROTECT

ETC SLIDE SHOW

DELETE ALL

EORTM

4

MEMORY SET

CONTINUOUS QUALITY

QALI TY

FLD./FRAME

PRINT MARK

PROTECT

ETC SLIDE SHOW

DELETE ALL

FORMAT

RETURN

MEMORY SET 10/12

CONTINUOUS

QUALITY

EID/FRAME

[PRINT MARK]ON

PROTECT MARKS ON

PROTECT

1. DESELECT ALL

DELETES

FORMAT

RETURN

5

MEMORY SET

CONTINUOUS

QUALITY

FID/FRAME

PDB:7AHPAME 1 PRINT MARK ON

PROTECT

PROTECT TO G156

E

DELETE ALL

FORMAT

RETURN

To cancel writing print marks

Select OFF in step 5, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

If the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK

You cannot write print marks on still images.

Длг OTMeHbI 3aINcN NeayTHbIX 3HaKOB

BbIbePeTe yCTaHOBky OFF B nyHKTe 5, a 3aTeM haxmTe DNCK SEL/PUSH EXEC.

EcIn IeNecToK 3aunTbI 3aHnCn Ha Memory Stick yctaHOBJIEN B nOLOXeHne LOCK

BbI He CMOXeTe 3aIncatb neaThbte 3HaKn Ha HENoDBrXhBix N3O6paXeHnIX.

- DCR-TRV10E only

Deleting selected images

Before operation

Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

(1) Play back the image you want to delete.
(2) Press MEMORY DELETE with a sharppointed object. "DELETE?" appears on the LCD screen.
(3) Press MEMORY DELETE again. The selected image is deleted.

-Тольковедель DCR-TRV10E

YdaJIeHne BbIbpaHHbIX n3o6paxKeHn

Ipeed hauanom pa6oTbi

BcTaBbTe Memory Stick B Bauy BnDeokamepy.

(1)Bocnpoun3BeDnTe n3o6paXeHne, KOTOpoe BbIXOHTe ydaIITb.
(2)Haxmnte KhONky MEMORY DELETE c nOMOuIbIO 3aocTpEHHOro IpeMeta.Ha 3KpaHe KKД NOBtCn INdNkauN "DELETE?"
(3)HaKMMTe KHOKNy MEMORY DELETE eue pa3. BbI6paHHe n3O6paXeHne 6yJeT ydaJIeHo.

To cancel deleting an image

Press MEMORY - in step 3.

To delete an image displayed on the index screen

Press MEMORY + / - to move the indicator to the desired image and follow steps 2 and 3.

Notes

• To delete a protected image, first cancel image protection.
• Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Check the images to delete carefully before deleting them.

Deleting all the images

You can delete all the unprotected images in a Memory Stick.

Длг OTMeHbI ydaJIeHnI N3O6paXeHnI

HaxmTe KhoNky MEMORY-B nyHKe 3.

Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the lock is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to make the MENU display appear.
(3)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select DELETE ALL, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. "OK" changes to "EXECUTE."
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. "DELETING" appears on the LCD screen. When all the unprotected images are deleted, "COMPLETE" is displayed.

Ipeed nauaIom pa6oTbi

BcTaBbTe Memory Stick B Bauy BnuDeokamepy.

(1)YcTaHOBInTe nepeKJIIOuHaTeIb POWER B noJIOXeHnE MEMORY. Y6eJINTeCb, yTO qKCaTOp yCTaHOBJIeN B JEBOM (He3aФИKICIPOBaHHOM) NOJIOXeHm.
(2)HaxMMTe KhoNky MENU, YTO6bI Ha DnCJIe e nOBuJaCb INDnKaUaIa MENU.
(3)ПовернITEДСКSEL/PUSHEXECДЯBBбopaуCTaHOBKN，a3aTeMнанKMITEДСК.
(4)ПовернITE DMCK SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЯ Быбopa установки DELETE ALL, a 3aTeM НжмкпЕ DMCK.
(5)ПовернITE ДСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЯ БИБОGA усыановки OK,а затем нахмтЕ ДСК.Индикагя“OK”изменчсни Индикагио“EXECUTE”.
(6)ПовернITE дисK SEL/PUSH EXEC дя Быбoga установки EXECUTE,а затем нхмтete дис.На ЗкраежКД повстс индикал＂DELETING".Кordа Вс неба Heaшишении n3обрахеня 6удт удалны,ндилгпee повстс Индикал＂ "COMPLETE".

To cancel deleting all the images in the Memory Stick

Select RETURN in step 4, then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC.

While "DELETING" appears

Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons.

If the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK

You cannot delete images.

Длг OTMeHbI ydaJIeHnBCEx n3o6paxeHn Ha Memory Stick

BbIbePte yCTaHOBky RETURN B nyHKTe 4, a 3aTEM haxMnte KhONKy SEL/PUSH EXEC

Bo Bpem OTo6paXeHn HndkaCn "DELETING"

He n3meHnIte noIOxKeHne nepeKJIIOuHaTeJIa POWER n He naKImaIte KaKnx-JIn6o KhoNOK.

EcIn IeNecToK 3aunTbI 3anncn HaMemory Stick yctahOBJIeB bnoJoxeHne LOCK

BbI He cMOKeTe ydaJIInTb n3O6paXeHnA.

Playing back images in a continuous loop - SLIDE SHOW

- DCR-TRV10E only

You can automatically play back images in sequence. This function is useful especially when checking recorded images or during a presentation.

Before operation

Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the lock is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to make the MENU display appear.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select , then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select SLIDE SHOW, then press the dial.
(5) Press MEMORY PLAY. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on a Memory Stick in sequence.

Bocnpon3BeJeHne n3o6paXeHn BHeIpepbIBHOI NOcIeIOBaTeJIbHOCTNIO 3aMKHyTOMy cIKJy - SLIDE SHOW

-ToIbKO moIeJIb DCR-TRV10E

BbMOxTe aBTOMaTnueeCKN BOCPON3BOoNTb
H3O6paXeHNr B HEnpepBIBHOI
IOcNEIOBaTeJIbHOCTN. 3Ta yHKnUy ABJReTc
PiOne3HO OOC6eHNo Ppi npOBepKe 3aIncaHHbIX
H3O6paXeHN uIN BO BVpEMr Ipe3eHTaUN.

Паран налом pa60ть

BcTabbTe Memory Stick B Bauly Bndeokamepy.

(1)YcTaHOBInTe NepeKJIIOUaTeIb POWER B noJIOXeHne MEMORY. Y6eJntEcb, yTO 2nKcaTOp yCtAHOBJIeH B JEBOM (He3aФNkCINPOBaHHOM) NOJIOXeHm.
(2)HaxMMTe KhoNky MENU, YTo6bHa NInCJIeepoBnIacb INDkaIaIaIcIaIe MENU.
(3)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЯ Быбopa установки , a 3aTeM нажмITE ДИСК.
(4)ПовернITE ДИСК SEL/PUSH EXEC ДЯ Быбopa установки SLIDE SHOW, a 3atem навKMЛТЕ ДИСК.
(5)HaxmTe KhoNky MEMORY PLAY. BawaBnDeOkamepa BocPon3BeDet n3o6paXeHna,3aIncAHbIe HaMemory Stick,BHepepbHbON nocJeDoBaTeJbHoCTn.

To stop the slide show

Press MENU.

To pause during a slide show

Press MEMORY PLAY.

To start the slide show from a particular image

Select the desired image using MEMORY + / - buttons before step 2.

To view the recorded images on TV

Connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/V connecting cable supplied with your camcorder before operation.

If you change the Memory Stick during operation

The slide show does not operate. If you change the Memory Stick, be sure to follow the steps again from the beginning.

ДлЯ OCTaHOBKN DeMOHCTpaCIN cIaNIOB

HaxmTe KhONKy MENU.

Iy3bI BO BpemA DEMOHCTpaCn CnaIOB

HaxmTe KhoNky MEMORY PLAY.

Дян haуала nokaza сайдов с onpeendeHHoro n3o6paKeHHa

BbIbePeTe HxHHe N3O6paXeHne C nOMoCbIO KhoNOK MEMORY +/- nepeJ nyHKTom 2.

Selecting cassette types

You can use the Mini DV cassette only*. You cannot use any other 8 mm, HiHi8,

Digital8,VHS VHS,VHSC VHSC,SVHS S-VHS, VSCHS-VHSC,B Betamax or DV cassette.

• There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with cassette memory and without cassette memory. We recommend you to use the tape with cassette memory.

The IC memory is mounted on this type of mini DV cassette. Your camcorder can read and write data such as dates of recording or titles, etc. to this memory.

The functions using the cassette memory require successive signals recorded on the tape. If the tape has a blank portion in the beginning or between the recorded portions, a title may not be displayed properly or the search functions may not work properly. Not to make any blank portion on the tape, operate the followings. Press END SEARCH to go to the end of the recorded portion before you begin the next recording if you operate the followings:

• you have ejected the cassette while recording.
• you have played back the tape in the PLAYER.
• you have used the edit search function.

If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signal on your tape, re-record from the beginning to the end of the tape concerning above.

The same result may occur when you record using a digital video camera recorder without a cassette memory function on a tape recorded by one with the cassette memory function.

Tapes with cassette memory have CIII (Cassette Memory) mark. Sony recommends that you use a tape having CIII mark to enjoy your camcorder fully.

CII4K mark on the cassette

The memory capacity of tapes marked with CII4K is 4KB. Your camcorder can accommodate tapes having a memory capacity of up to 16KB. 16KB tape is marked with CII16K.

Bb6op Tnna Kaccet

BbMoKeTe NcNoJIb3OBAbT ToJIbKO KaCCeTb MmH DV MinV. Bb He MoKeTe NcNoJIb3OBAbT KaKne-Jn6o DpyIe KacCetb TmNa 8 MM, HiB Hi8, Digital8,VHS VHS,VHSvHS S-VHS,SvHS S-VHS, Betamax nIu TmNa DV.

*IMeETcBbTnPaKacCTMmHNV:C KaccETHOI pAMrTBIO n6e3 KACCETHOI pAMrTI. PeKOMeHNyETcNcNOJIb3ObaTbJeHTbIC KaccETHOI pAMrTBIO.

Ha daHOM Tnne Kaccet MNH DV yctahOBneha
namrB B nide INTErpalbHO CXembl. Baia
BnDEOKaMepa MOKET CHTbBAbT N 3anncbBAbT
daHHbIE, TaKHe KAc DaTb 3aNcNn TTtpbl N
T.I. Ha daHNy IO NTerpaIbHyO CXemy.
FyHKuIN, IcNoJIb3yIOUe KACCtEHYIO nAMrTB,
Tpe6yIOT NocLeDoBATEbHbIe CNHAbI,
3aNcAnHbIe Ha JeNTy. EcNn HaJeHTe IMeETCn
He3aNcAnHbIy UCACTOK B HauJaIe NIn MekJy
3aNcAnHbIMn YAcTAMn, TO TnTp MoKET 6bITb He
OTobpaxen HaJnxKaUIM ObaZom NIn Xe
fynkui nnouCKa MoryT pa6oTaB He npabNbHO.
DnToro, YTObIe He DOnyckaTb He3aNcAnHbIX
yucTkoB HaJeHTe, BbIOJNHte CNe dyUoee.
HaxmTe KNOH Ky END SEARCH dnn nepexoda
K KOChy 3aNcAnHOrO yUacTKa nepeD Tem, KaK
BbHauchTe CNe dyUOyO 3aNcB, eCNn BblBOJINNI CNe dyUOee:

-BbI n3BnEkn KaccTey Bo BpeM 3aHcN.

-BbI Bocnpo3BeJI NHeTу BpeKIme PLAYER.

-BbI NCNoJIb3OBAaII ΦyHKUIO MOHTaXHOro NOUCKA.

EcniHa BaWei IeHTe IMeEeTc He3aPiNcaHHbI yuactOK uIN npepbBaIOUoiCnHaN, BbINOHNTEpe3aPiNcb CHaJaNo KOHua daHHoro yuactKa.

TaKoJ KZe pe3yIbTaT MoXeT NOLuYHtBcR npn BbIOnNHeHm 3aIcnC nOMOuBIO cIqDpBOB BnDEOKaMepBo 63ФyHKUIN KACCETHOI pAMrTn Ha IeHTy, 3aIncaHHyO KeM-ImoC O nOMOuBIO fФyHKUIN KACCETHOI pAMrTn.

JIeHTbI C KAcCtHoi NaMaTbIO NaMaTbIO IMeIOT 3HaK CII (KacceTHaN PAmTb).ΦIpMa Sony peKOMeHpyET NcONb3OBA TbJeHTy CO 3HaKOM CII IaI noHOro HacLaJdEHNBaWei BnDeOkamepoI.

Using any other video camera recorder, you cannot record on a tape that has recorded a copyright control signals for copyright protection of software which is played back on your camcorder.

Audio mode

12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in stereo 2 in 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 can be adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX in the MENU settings during playback. Both sounds can be played back.

16-bit mode: A new sound cannot be recorded but the original sound can be recorded in high quality. Moreover, it can also play back sound recorded in 32kHz , 44.1kHz or 48kHz . When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, 16BIT indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

When you play back a dual sound track tape

When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in a stereo system, set "HiFi SOUND" to the desired mode in the MENU settings (p. 87).

Sound from speaker

HiFi Sound Mode	Playing back a stereo tape	Playing back a dual sound track tape
STEREO	Stereo	Main sound and sub sound
1	Left sound	Main sound
2	Right sound	Sub sound

You cannot record dual sound programmes on your camcorder.

PnBocnpOn3VeJeHn

CunHaI abTOPcKOro npaba Pn BocnpOn3VeDeHn

NcnoIb3yraKakyIO-Ni6o DpyryIO BnDEOKaMepy, BbI He MoKeTe BbIIOJIHNTb 3aNNCb HaJeHTy,Ha KOTOpO 3aIINCAHbCINHaJIb ABTOPCKORo npaba DnI 3aUHTb ABTOPCKNX pab INporpAMM, BOCnpOn3BOIDMbIX Ha BaWeBnDEOKaMepe.

Aydnopexum

12-6bTobbypeKIM:IepBOHaayBbHb3ByK MOKeT 6bITb 3aPcAn hA cTepeofoHnueckn KaHal 1,aHObYb3BYK-Ha cTepeofoHnueckn KaHal 2 B pexIMe 32 Kf, BaJAHc MExJy cTepeofoHnueckm KaHaiom 1 n cTepeofoHnueckm KaHaiom 2 MoXHo OTperyInpoBaTb PyTeM BbIbopa yCTaHOBKn AUDIO MIX B yCTaHOBkax MENU BO Bpemr BOCpOIm3BeDeHn. BblMoKTe BOCpOIm3BODnTb Oba 3ByKa.

16-6bTOBbI pEXIM: HObI 3ByK He MoXeT 6bITb 3aINcAH, Ondako nepBOHaJbHbI 3ByK MOxEe 6bITb 3aINcAH C BbICOKM KaYeCTBOM. KpOME TOrO, 3ByK MOxHO BOCPON3BOIDnB B peXImax 32 kTc, 44,1 kTc nIIN 48 kTc. PInB OBCPON3BeDeHNn IeHTbl, 3aINcAHHO B 16-6bTOBOM pEXIMe, Ha 3kpaHe KKД nIN B BVIOINCKaTeI NOBtca INDnKaTop 16BIT.

PnBocnpOn3BeJeHm JeHTbI C DBOHOH 3ByKOBOJ DOPOXKOJ

При ВOCирюзBEдени Лentы CДBOИнОВ 3БУКОВОД ДорожКо,ЗАпсанHоВ CBtepeофонческо ССТЕМ,уCTаHOBITe KOMaHДу "HiFi SOUND"В Нухньи ржIM B yctahOBkax MENU (cTp.87).

3Byk OTДиHamnka

Рек imm 3Byuahnia HiFi	Восprоизve徴ие стrepoфонческо лeнтуbl	Восprоизve徴ие пeнтуbl с двоюно 3BykoBoД Dorpoхко
STEREO	Стrepo	Ос hoBон 3Byk И ВсПOMoRaTeЛьны 3ByK
1	3Byk Левого Канала	Ос hoBон 3Byk
2	3Byk павого Канала	Ос hoBон 3Byk

BbHe MoKeTe 3aIINcIbA Tb npOrpaMMbIC DBoHbIM 3ByaHnEm Ha BaWei BnDeokaMepe.

Be sure to affix a label only on the locations as illustrated below [a] so as not to cause malfunction of your camcorder.

Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it in an upright position.

Cleaning gold-plated connector

If the gold-plated connector of mini DV cassettes is dirty or dusty, you may not operate the function using cassette memory. Clean up the gold-plated connector with cotton-wool swab, about every 10 times ejection of a cassette. [b]

PpmeaHn no KaccTe MmN DV

Pnp npnKpeHneHH 3TKeTKn Ha KaccTey MmH DV

CdeIte 3a Tem, TTo6bI 3TKeTkn
PnIKpeINJIINCb TOJbKO MeCTax, KaK NOKa3aHO
Ha pncyHKax HNXe [a], TaK TTo6bI He HApUHITb
HOpMaJIbHOe FyHKUHOHPOBaHHe
BUNDeOKaMEpbI.

Pocne nCnoJIb3OBAHnKacCeTbIMHH DV

Ipeemotai Te JnHTy K Naay, noJoxnte KaCCTe B cyTnp I xpaHnTe KACCteB BePTNKaJIbHOM nOLOXeHm.

Ouictka no30JoueHHoro pa3bema

Ecni no3o1ooyHbI pa3bEm KaccET MHN DV 3aqr3HeN IIN 3aBJIeN, Bbl He cMOxTe ynpabTb cyHKUeN C NOMOuH KaccetHOI namrIn. OunlaTe no3o1ooyHbI pa3bEm C nOMOuXnONuTaObyMaxJHO TaMNoHa npImepHo nocIe 10 pa3 nCnoJb3OBaHnKaccTebl. [b]

If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If "C:□□:□□" appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 137.

In the recording mode

Symptom	Cause and/or Corrective Actions
START/STOP does not operate.	·The POWER switch is set to PLAYER. →Set it to CAMERA. (p. 20) ·The POWER switch is set to OFF. →Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. (p. 20) ·The tape has run out. →Rewind the tape or insert a new one. (p. 19, 33) ·The write-protect tab is set to expose the red mark. →Use a new tape or slide the tab. (p. 19) ·The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation). →Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least 1 hour to acclimatize. (p. 149)
Recording stops in a few seconds.	·START/STOP MODE is set to 5SEC or ↓. →Set it to ↓. (p. 25)
The power goes off.	·While being operated in the CAMERA mode, your camcorder has been in the standby mode for more than 5 minutes. →Set the POWER switch to OFF and then to CAMERA again. (p. 20)
The image on the viewfinder screen is not clear.	·The viewfinder lens is not adjusted. →Adjust the viewfinder lens. (p. 23)
The SteadyShot function does not work.	·STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the MENU settings. →Set it to ON. (p. 87)
The autofocus function does not work.	·FOCUS is set to MANUAL. →Set it to AUTO. (p. 60) ·Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus. →Set FOCUS to MANUAL to focus manually. (p. 60)
The fader function does not work.	·START/STOP MODE is set to 5SEC or ↓. →Set it to ↓. (p. 25) ·The digital effect function is working. →Cancel it. (p. 53)
The indicator flashes in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen.	·The video heads may be dirty. →Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). (p. 150)
The picture does not appear in the viewfinder.	·The LCD panel is open. →Close the LCD panel. (p. 22)
A vertical band appears when you shoot a subject such as lights or a candle flame against a dark background.	·The contrast between the subject and background is too high. Your camcorder is not a malfunction.
A vertical band appears when you shoot a very bright subject.	·Your camcorder is not a malfunction.
Some tiny white spots appear in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen.	·Slow shutter, low lux or NightShot +Slow shutter mode is activated. This is not a malfunction.
An unknown picture is displayed in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen.	·If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the MENU settings without a cassette inserted, your camcorder automatically starts the demonstration. →Insert a cassette and the demonstration stops. You can also cancel DEMO MODE. (p. 92)
The picture is recorded in incorrect or unnatural colours.	·NIGHTSHOT is set to ON. →Set it to OFF. (p. 28)
Picture appears too bright, and the subject does not appear in the viewfinder or on the LCD screen.	·NIGHTSHOT is set to ON in a bright place. →Set it to OFF, or use the NightShot function in a dark place. (p. 28)
The click of the shutter does not sound.	·BEEP is set to OFF in the MENU settings. →Set it to MELODY or NORMAL. (p. 87)

In the playback mode

Symptom	Cause and/or Corrective Actions
The tape does not move when a video control button is pressed.	·The POWER switch is set to CAMERA or OFF. →Set it to PLAYER. (p. 33) ·The tape has run out. →Rewind the tape. (p. 33)
The playback picture is not clear or does not appear.	·The television's video channel is not adjusted correctly. →Adjust it. (p. 38)
There are nine horizontal lines on the picture or the playback picture is not clear or does not appear.	·The video head may be dirty. →Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). (p. 150)
No sound or only a low sound is heard when playing back a tape.	·The volume is turned to minimum. →Open the LCD panel and press VOLUME+. (p. 33) ·AUDIO MIX is set to ST2 in the MENU settings. →Adjust AUDIO MIX. (p. 87)
Displaying the recorded date, date search function does not work.	·The tape has no cassette memory. →Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 66, 129) ·CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the MENU settings. →Set it to ON. (p. 87)

(continued on the following page)

Symptom	Cause and/or Corrective Actions
The title search function does not work.	·The tape has no cassette memory. →Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 129) ·CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the MENU settings. →Set it to ON. (p. 87) ·There is no title in the tape. →Superimpose the titles. (p. 79)
The new sound added to the recorded tape is not heard.	·AUDIO MIX is set to ST1 side in the MENU settings. →Adjust AUDIO MIX in the MENU settings. (p. 87)
The title is not displayed.	·TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the MENU settings. →Set it to ON in the MENU settings. (p. 87)
The date search or title search does not work correctly.	·The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion (p. 129)

In the recording and playback modes

Symptom	Cause and/or Corrective Actions
The power does not turn on.	· The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead. → Install a charged battery pack. (p. 12, 13) · The AC power adaptor is not connected to the mains. → Connect the AC power adaptor to the mains. (p. 18)
The end search function does not work.	· The tape was ejected after recording when using a tape without cassette memory. · You have not recorded on the new cassette yet.
The end search function does not work correctly.	· The tape has a blank portion in the beginning or middle.
The battery pack is quickly discharged.	· The operating temperature is too low. · The battery pack is not fully charged. → Charge the battery pack again. (p. 13) · The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged. → Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 12)
The battery remaining indicator does not indicate the correct time.	· You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or cold environment for a long time. · The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged. → Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 12) · The battery is dead. → Use a charged battery pack. (p. 12, 13)
The cassette cannot be removed from the holder.	· The power source is disconnected. → Connect it firmly. (p. 12, 18) · The battery is dead. → Use a charged battery pack or the AC power adaptor. (p. 12, 18)
The ☑ and ▲ indicators flash and no functions except for cassette ejection work.	· Moisture condensation has occurred. → Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least 1 hour to acclimate. (p. 149)
CIII indicator does not appear when using a tape with cassette memory.	· The gold-plated connector of the tape is dirty or dusty. → Clean the gold-plated connector. (p. 131)
Remaining tape indicator is not displayed.	· The ☑ REMAIN is set to AUTO in the MENU settings. → Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape indicator. (p. 87)

When operating using the Memory Stick

• DCR-TRV10E only

Symptom	Cause and/or Corrective Actions
The Memory Stick does not function.	· The POWER switch is set to CAMERA. → Set it to MEMORY. (p. 103)
Recording does not function.	· The Memory Stick has already been recorded to its full capacity. → Erase unnecessary images and record again. (p. 124, 106) · The Memory Stick is not inserted. → Insert a Memory Stick. (p. 102) · Unformatted Memory Stick is inserted. → Format the Memory Stick. (p. 105) · The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. → Slide the tab to write. (p. 100)
The image cannot be deleted.	· The image is protected. → Cancel image protection. (p. 121)
You cannot format the Memory Stick.	· The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. → Set the tab to write. (p. 100) · Memory Stick is not inserted. → Insert a Memory Stick. (p. 102)
Deleting all the images cannot be carried out.	· The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. → Set the tab to write. (p. 100) · Memory Stick is not inserted. → Insert a Memory Stick. (p. 102)
You cannot protect the image.	· The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. → Set the tab to write. (p. 100) · The image to protect is not be played back. → Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 114) · Memory Stick is not inserted. → Insert a Memory Stick. (p. 102)
You cannot write a print mark on the still image.	· The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. → Set the tab to write. (p. 100) · The image to write a print mark is not be played back. → Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 114) · Memory Stick is not inserted. → Insert a Memory Stick. (p. 102)
The slide show function does not work.	· Memory Stick is not inserted. → Insert a Memory Stick. (p. 100)
The photo save function does not work.	· The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK. → Set the tab to write. (p. 100) · Memory Stick is not inserted. → Insert a Memory Stick. (p. 102)

(continued on the following page)

Others

Symptom	Cause and/or Corrective Actions
The title is not recorded.	·The tape has no cassette memory. →Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 129) ·The cassette memory is full. →Erase another title. (p. 82) ·The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure. →Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible. (p. 19) ·Nothing is recorded in that position on the tape. →Superimpose the title to the recorded position. (p. 79)
The cassette label is not recorded.	·The tape has no cassette memory. →Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 129) ·The cassette memory is full. →Erase some titles. (p. 82) ·The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure. →Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible. (p. 19)
While editing using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), recording picture cannot be monitored.	·Remove the i.LINIK cable (DV connecting cable), and connect it again.
DV synchro-editing does not function. (DCR-TRV10E only)	·The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly. →Set the selector to DV input position. If you use another DV camcorder, set the power switch to VTR. ·The camcorder is connected to DV equipment of other than Sony. →Operate normal editing. ·Setting programme on a blank portion of the tape is attempted. →Set the programme again on a recorded portion.
The Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder does not work.	·COMMANDER is set to OFF in the MENU settings. →Set it to ON. (p. 87) ·Something is blocking the infrared rays. →Remove the obstacle. ·The batteries are inserted in the battery holder with the + - polarities incorrectly matching the + - marks. →Insert the batteries with the correct polarity. (p. 165) ·The batteries are dead. →Insert new ones. (p. 165)
The melody or beep sounds for 5 seconds.	·Moisture condensation has occurred. →Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least 1 hour to acclimate. (p. 149) ·Some troubles has occurred in your camcorder. →Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your camcorder.
While charging the battery pack, no indicator appears or the indicator flashes in the display window.	·The AC power adaptor is disconnected. →Connect it firmly. (p. 18) ·Something is wrong with the battery pack. →Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
No function works though the power is on.	·Disconnect the mains lead of the AC power adaptor or remove the battery, then reconnect it in about 1 minute. Turn the power on. If the functions still do not work, open the LCD panel and press the RESET button beside the speaker using a sharp-pointed object. (If you press the RESET button, all the settings including the date and time return to the default.) (p. 158)

Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display function.

This function displays the current condition of your camcorder as a 5-digit code (a combination of a letter and figures) in the viewfinder, on the LCD screen or in the display window. If a 5-digit code is displayed, check the following code chart. The last two digits (indicated by ) will differ depending on the state of your camcorder.

Viewfinder (or LCD screen)

Self-diagnosis display
C:□□：□□
You can service your camcorder yourself.
-E:□□：□□
Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony facility.

Five-digit display	Cause and/or Corrective Actions
C:04:□□	·You are using a battery pack that is not an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. →Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack. (p. 17)
C:21:□□	·Moisture condensation has occurred. →Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least 1 hour to acclimate. (p. 149)
C:22:□□	·The video heads are dirty. →Clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). (p. 150)
C:31:□□	·A malfunction other than the above that you can service has occurred.
C:32:□□	·Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your camcorder. →Disconnect the mains lead of the AC power adaptor or remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power source, operate your camcorder.
E:61:□□	·A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.
E:62:□□	→Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility and inform them of the 5-digit code. (example: E:61:10)

If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times, contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

Warning indicators and messages

If indicators and messages appear in the viewfinder, on the LCD screen or in the display window, check the following:

See the page in parentheses “( )” for more information.

• The warning messages do not appear in the mirror mode.
• The indicators and messages are displayed in yellow.

Warning indicators

The video heads are dirty

Slow flashing:

• You need to clean the heads using the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied) (p. 150).

The battery is dead or nearly dead

Slow flashing:

• The battery is nearly dead.
  Fast flashing:
  The battery is dead (p. 13).

Depending on conditions, the indicator may flash, even if there are 5 to 10 minutes remaining.

Warning indicator as to tape Slow flashing:

The tape is near the end.
- No tape is inserted (p. 19).*

Fast flashing:

The tape has run out (p. 19, 33).
- The write-protect tab on the cassette is out (red) (p. 19).

You need to eject the cassette Slow flashing:

• The write-protect tab on the cassette is out (red) (p. 19).*

Fast flashing:

• Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 149).
  The tape has run out (p. 19, 33).*
• The self-diagnosis display function is activated (p. 137).*

Moisture condensation has occurred* Fast flashing:

• Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about 1 hour with the cassette compartment open (p. 149).
  Warning indicator as to cassette memory Slow flashing:
• No tape with cassette memory is inserted (p. 19).*

C:21:00

Self-diagnosis display (p. 137)

Warning indicator as to Memory Stick (DCR-TRV10E only) Slow flashing:

• No Memory Stick is inserted (p. 102).*
  Memory Stick is not formatted correctly (p. 105).

The still image is protected (DCR-TRV10E only)

Slow flashing:

• The still image is protected (p. 121).*

Warning messages

• CLOCK SET Reset the date and time (p. 98).
• For "InfoLITHIUM" Use an "InfoLIHIUM" battery pack (p. 17). BATTERY ONLY

CLEANING CASSETTE

The video heads are dirty (p. 150).

FULL The tape cassette memory is full.
16BIT AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT (p. 87). You cannot dub new sound.
REC MODE REC MODE is set to LP (p. 87). You cannot dub new sound.
- TAPE There is no recorded portion on the tape. You cannot dub new sound.
- “i.LINK” CABLE i.LINK cable is connected (p. 73). You cannot dub new sound.
AV CABLE A/V connecting cable is connected (p. 38). You cannot dub new sound.
FULL The Memory Stick is full. (DCR-TRV10E only)
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK (p. 100). (DCR-TRV10E only)
No still image is recorded on the Memory Stick (p. 106).* (DCR-TRV10E only)
NO MEMORY STICK No Memory Stick is inserted (p. 102). (DCR-TRV10E only)

• You hear the melody or beep sound.

Понск и устараенье несправност

Ecni y Bac Bo3NKkna kakaJ-1n6 npo6Iema npi nCnoJIb3OBAHn BVideOKaMepbl, BOCnoJIb3yntec b cIeDyUoSeT TaBnueJ IJN O TBicKaHn I yCTpaHeHn I npo6IemaI. EcNI npo6Iema He ycTpAnHETcR, TO cIeDyET OTcoEHNHTb NtOuHKn IITaHnI N o6pATNTbC B CepBNCbH N CEHTp SONY IIIN B MeCTHOe yONHOMOeHHOE ppeInpraTne IO bcnyXnBaHnIO 3dJIeNl SNoy. EcNI Ha 3KpaHe XXKD IIIN B BVIOINCKaTeNe NOBNTcN INDkaZnN "C:□□:□□", 3TO 3NaHT, YTO cpa6OTana fYHKzN DmCInJe caMOdNarHocTNK. CM. cTp. 145.

B pexkme 3ainnc

• BbIToJKNHtE KACCETy, BblKIOUHTe BaUy BnDeOKaMepy N OCTaBbTe ee npIMepHo Ha 1 Yac C OTKpbITbIM OTCEKOM IJI KACCETbI (CTp. 149).

PpeDynpexkaIOUne INHnKaTOpbl KACCEbI C nAMrTbIO

MeJleHHeMurahHe:

• YctaHOBHeHa JeHTa 6e3 KaCCeTHoI nAMrTu (CTp. 19).*

C:21:00

Инданаши самоdnarHocTNK (cTp. 145).*

IpeDynpexkaUoJne HndIkAToPbI Memory Stick (ToIbKO MoJeB DCR-TRV10E)

MeJHeHHoe MItaHne:

• He yctaHOBJIeHa Memory Stick (cTp. 102).*
  Memory Stick orΦopMaTIpOBaHa HnepaBnIbHo (ctp. 105).

3aunTa n3o6paXeHnA

(Tolbko MoJoelb DCR-TRV10E)

MeJHeHHe MURaHne:

He BCtabneHa Memory Stick (ctp. 102).* (ToIbko MoJeIb DCR-TRV10E)

*BbyycblbIHTeMeNoIOIOIIN3yMmepHbCnHaJ.

Using your camcorder abroad

Using your camcorder abroad

You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder within 100V to 240V AC, 50 / 60Hz .

Your camcorder is a PAL system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback picture on a TV, it must be a PAL system based TV with VIDEO/AUDIO input jack. The following shows TV colour systems used overseas.

PAL system Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Great Britain, Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, etc.

PAL-M system Brazil

PAL-N system Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay

NTSC system
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc.

SECAM system Bulgaria, France, Guyana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc.

Simple setting of clock by time difference

You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select WORLD TIME in the MENU settings. See page 92 for more information.

Maintenance information and precautions

Moisture condensation

If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this condition, the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep sounds and the indicator flashes. When the indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is inserted in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not appear.

If moisture condensation occurred

None of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about 1 hour with the cassette compartment open. Your camcorder can be used again if the indicator does not appear when the power is turned on again.

Note on moisture condensation

Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:

• You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by a heating device
• You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place outside
• You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower
• You use your camcorder in a high temperature and humidity place

How to prevent moisture condensation

When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about 1 hour).

Информацnia по ухODу 3a apnapaTom И МерыnpedoctopoxkHOCTN

KoHdEhCaunBlaIaI

EcIn BnDeOkamepa npHecena npramo n3 XOJOnHOrO MeCTa B TeJIIOe,TO BHyTpN BVNeOkAmepeI,Ha NOBepXHOCTn JENTbI IIN Ha 6ObKeTbE MoKET npON30tN KOHeHCAuN BlaRi. B TAKOM COCTOHN JENTa MoKET npININHTb K 6apabahy rONOBKn i 6yDet NOBpeXdHa NII Jne BnDEOkamepa He CMOKET pa6oTaB HAnEkaUm O6pa3Om. EcIn BNYtpN BVNeOkAmepb I pON30UHa KOHeHCAuN BlaRi, TO pON3ByuNT 3YMMepHBn CnHaN, a HA 3KpaHe KKJ 6yDet MmraTb INDkATop E.Cnn B To Jx e camoe BPemr 6yDet MmraTb INDkATop A,3TO 3NaHT, YTO B NDeOkAmepy BCTaBnHe kacceta.EcIn Bnara cKOHDeHCnpOBaLacb Ha 6ObKeTbE, INDkATOp NOABJIaTbc H6yDet.

Ecn npon3oJla KOHdEHCaIgBnaI

Hn Onda H3 cyHKcun, Kpome BbItaKbHaNn KaCCeTbI, He 6yDyT pa6OtaTb. N3BLeKeNte KacCteTy, BbIKJIOUHTe BnDEOKaMEpy N OCTaBbTe ee np6JIIN3NTeNbHO Ha 1 qac COTkpBTbIM OTCEKOM DnA KACcTeB. Ecnn Pnpi NOBTOPHOM BKJIIOUChENn INTaHn INdNKaTOP He NOBNTCA Ha DnCPIee, Bbl MoXeTe CHOba NOnb3ObaTbcBn DEOKaMEpoi.

PpimeyaHne no KOHeHcaun BlaRn

Bnara moKET o6pa3oBaTbC8, ecn BblnpHeceTe BaUy BnDeokamepy nX xOIoHOroMeCTa B TeNIOe (nn Hao6OpOT) nn KOrJa BblncNoIb3yTe BaUy BnDeokamepy B JkapKomMeCTe B cJeDyUOuX CnyaAx:

• Bby npinhecn Bauy Bndeokamepy c IbIXHOROCKHOHa B NOMeueHne, rIe yHKUOHpyeToborpBeTaTeB
  BbI npHecn Bauy Bndeokamepy n3 aBTOMO6nI INI IN I3 KOMHaTbI C BO3dUHbIM KOHNIOHPOBaHnEM B JxapKoe MeCTo Ha yInuE
  BbI nCnoJIb3ye Te BnDeOkaMepy nocne rpo3bl nn DoXd
• Bby nCnoJb3yeTe BaUy BnDeokamepy B OueHb Kapkom n BnaxKHom MecTe.

Kak npedotBpaTntb KOHdeHcaHIO BnaI

EcIn BnDeOKaMepa npHecHa n3 XoNoHOrO MeCTa B TeNIOE,TO NIOXKeTbe BNDeOKaMepy B NIOIN3TNHeOBbI NaKeT I NIOToHO 3aKNeIeIero.BbInbTe BNDeOKaMepy n3 NIOIN3TNHeOBoro NaKeTa,KorTa TEMpeAtypa BO3dyxa BHyTpIn NaKeTa DOCTnIRHTempeAtypbI OKpyJaIOUero BO3dyxa (PpN6bn3nteJbHo uepe3 1 ac).

Maintenance information

Cleaning the video head

To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads. The video head may be dirty when:

• mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture.
• playback pictures do not move.
• playback pictures do not appear.
• the indicator and "CLEANING CASSETTE" message appear one after another or the indicator flashes on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

If the above problem, [a] or [b] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the Sony DVM12CL cleaning cassette (not supplied). Check the picture and if the above problem persists, repeat cleaning.

HΦopMaζη no yxody

Чистka вдебоголовк

Длбобсчесн_Hормально 3аиси n YETKOrO n3o6paxehnCneJyET nepNoDiuueckN YuCTNtB BIneorolOBKn. BIneorolOBKn BO3MoXH O3arP3HeHb, ecmI:

Ha BOCIPOM3BDOJIMOM N3O6paeKehnION8BJIOTCNAOMEXTNIAO3MAnK.
BOCPON3BOIDMOE N3O6paXeHne He DBNraTcA.
BOCPON3BOIDMOE N3O6paXeHHe NIOBJIaTeTcHa 3KpAHe.
- NaэкранеЖКДилВиДOMSCaTeNe NOВБЯHotc OдИNЗа ДугIM ИДДКATOP XИ COOБSEнe“CLEANING CASSETTE”илxe MnaeITHДNKATOp X

EcNn Bo3NHKHyT NOMEXI Tnna [a] nIIN [b], NOUcHtTe BnDEOrONBKN C NOMOJIbO ONUCTeINbHOJ KACCETbl Sony DVM12CL (He npriIaeraTcB) T byeHne 10 cekYHd. InpoBePte N3O6paXeHne H, ecNn OnuCAHnbYe BbIe npOBJembl He yctpaHmInCb, NOBTOpTE UcNTKy.

[a]
or/nn

[b]

Cleaning the LCD screen

If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using a LCD Cleaning Kit (not supplied) to clean the LCD screen.

Charging the vanadium-lithium battery in your camcorder

Your camcorder is supplied with a vanadium-lithium battery installed so as to retain the date and time, etc., regardless of the setting of the POWER switch. The vanadium-lithium battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The battery, however, will get discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder. It will be completely discharged in about a half year if you do not use your camcorder at all. Even if the vanadium-lithium battery is not charged, it will not affect the camcorder operation. To retain the date and time, etc., charge the battery if the battery is discharged.

Charging the vanadium-lithium battery:

• Connect your camcorder to mains using the AC power adaptor supplied with your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for more than 24 hours.
• Or install the fully charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for more than 24 hours.

Ynctka 3KpaHa KKd

Ecnna Ha 3Kpahe XKD nOBaTcO TneuATKn IIN PbInb, peKOMeHNyETcB OCN0JIb3OBAbTCn OHCTNTEnbHbIM naBOPm Dn JKKD (He npinlaraeTc) dnnuNTkn XKD.

3apKa BaHaDnEBO-JIHTneBOB 6aTapeKn B BaSei BnDeokampe

K Baωe BnDeokampe npinlaeraTcB aHaJneBOIHTNEBA batapeiKa, yctaHOBHeHcA TcEM, YTO6bl COxpaarBb NAMrN DaTy u BpEmu T.π. He3aBNCmO OY cTahOBKn nepeKnUoateHPOWER. BAnaDBeIOIHTNEBA batapeiKa 3apjXaeTcB CcerDa B To BpEmu KOrDa Bb IcNoIb3yeTe CBoO bIeDOKaMepy. OJaHao bAtapeiKa 6byet NoCTeNEHNO pa3PJAkTaC8,ecn Bb He IcNoIb3yeTe Bawy BnDeokampey. OHa npaKTNUeCKN pONHOCTb POa3PJIITcN pINMeMPHo Uepe3 nIoROda, eCNb Bi He 6bye Te IcNoIb3ObaTb Bawy BnDeokampey cOBsem. JaXe ecN BANaDBeIOIHTNEBA batapeiKa He 3apjXeHa, 3To He NOBImeT Ha pAOBy BnDeokampeBf. IJNa coxPAHeHry B nAMrTn DaTb I bPEMeHn CNeJyET 3apJNTb batapeiKy, ecn OHa pApRKeHa.

3apka BaHaDneBO-JInTHeBOB 6aTapeKn

ПодсоeДинiteБау WbIeOKeampey K cTeTc помочь сеТбOrO aadantepa nepeMeHnOToKa, прларaemoro K Baewi BbIeOKeampe,и OCTabTe Вау WbIeOKeampeY C bblKIOUeHbIM noloxeHnEM пeркliuOATEЯ NiTaHnA POWER 60JIee,Чм ha 24 чac.
-Иллжустановпгл�нocьюзаржehньбатаиньшквВаши ВдоекамеруиoctabteВаши ВдоекамерсБыкночесьmПОLOжehнempepekluohateяпintаня POWER60eee，чem ha 24yaac.

Precautions

Camcorder operation

• Operate your camcorder on 7.2V (battery pack) or 8.4V (AC power adaptor).
• For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in this operating instructions.
• If any solid object or liquid get inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.
• Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens.
• Keep the POWER switch set to OFF when you are not using your camcorder.
• Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so might cause heat to build up inside.
• Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.
• Do not touch the LCD screen with your fingers or a sharp-pointed object.
• If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD screen. This is not a malfunction.
• While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a malfunction.

On handling tapes

• Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out.
• Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the tape.
• Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with a soft cloth.

Camcorder care

• Remove the tape, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and PLAYER sections and play back a tape for about 3 minutes when your camcorder is not to be used for a long time.
• Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens, remove them with a soft cloth.
• Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the finish.
• Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.

MepblnpedocTopoXHoctn

3KcnplyaatauBvdeokamepbl

3KcIpyaTHpye BnDeOkaMepy ot 7,2B (6aTaapeHnh6Iok) mI8,4B (ceTeBoaIaANTep nepemEmHOrTOKA)
- UTo Kacaetcra3KcPnlyaatauMn BInDeokamepbbl OT NOCTOARHORo INpeMeHHORo TOKa,NCpONlb3yIte PnpHaJlEeXHoCTn,peKOMHeYdEmbIe B DaHHOI NHCTpyKUIMNo 3KcPnlyaatauMn.
Ecnn KaKoH-NbDyB TBepdb npEmT nINXuDKoCTb nOanl BYHTb KOpNcA, TO BbIKNoUHTBeBnDEKaMepy nnpobepbTe ee y Dnepa Sonye nepedDaIbHeiwee e3Knpyatauei.
Избегаите рубого образецни с вдевожамери и менихов. мениховски уларов.Будte осябенho octopoхъсь с оьбектим�.
- ECnn BIDeokape Me hncnlo3yeTcA, depXkITE BbIKNOUATENB POWER B noIooXEHN OFF.
He 3abopauBaiTe BAsy BIndeokamepy, Hanpimep, B noToneHne, I He 3KnnyaupuYe ee B TakOM coToHHN. B pOtnBbOM cIyae MoKet npOn3oTu NBbIeHne TEMnepaTyb BYHTpy BIndeokamepey.
-ДеркптЕБауВидекамepyNoдальшOTСилььхМагнIHbIXПОелИлМexaанчecкоВибраци.
H NeprkaacTecB KxpaHy JXKД CBOHMn PAnbIaMn IINN OCTbIMn PnpdMeTAMn.
- Pπn 3κCπnyataaun BaωeBνDεOKaMepbI B XOJODHOM Mecte,Ha 3κρaHe KKД можET NOBλTbCObCTaTOOHoe N3OBpaXeHne.3To He RBAJAEcH HeMCnpabHOCTbO.
-ПиEkCNYatauM BauB NduEOKAMEbpI,3aJHRA cTOpOHa 3KpAa KKД moKeTHarpeBaTbC.3To He RAJIeTcH HcNpRaBHOCTbIO.

OTHOCHTeNbHO o6paueHncaJeHTaM

He BCTabnIe HnHero B MaIehbKne OTBepCTnHa 3aIeHcTcPOHe KAcCtB.3TN OTBepCTn IcONb3yIOCTaN OIpEneHn TnA n TOIunHb IeHTb, a TaKxE dJa ONpeJeHn HaJIuHn IIN OTCytCTBn JIeNecTKa 3aUITb 3aIcnCn HaJeHTe.
He OTKpbIbAte npeOdoxpaHntelHyo KpbIshky JeHTbln He pRnkacaiTeB KJIeThe.
ИЗбегаитke kacaHIN INI NOBpeKdHnR NOIIOcOB.ДуdaJIeHnI bIyI NcCTNTE NOIIOca C NOMOsbHO MRTKOJ TKAHI.

YxOД 3a BnDeOKamepoI

• Пелнодуншу Кьнимау Кассу и Вклочауп.TNTANHUE, onepupyte yctpoiCTBAMN CAMERA uPLAYERиВocpoin3BODnTe HeTynpaKa 3-xMnHyT,ecnBaSha BVDeokamepe He bDeTINCOJbOBAtBCrДInIteJbHoe BPem.
• UcHTNE ObekTNB C NOMOJIbHO MRAKOK KIOCTOCH DNJyADJIENH PJIJI. ECLNI IMEOTCR OTNEUATKN PJIJIbcEHa OObekTMB, TO ydJIaTIne INC NOMOJIbHO MRAKOKTKAHI.
  YnCTNtE KOpNc BnDEOkAmePbI C NOMOsbCyXoB MTKoN TKAHN NIMMTRKoN TKAHN, CNErKa CMOeHNOI pACTBOPm UmepeHHoro MOHOero CpeDCTBa. He IcNoJIb3yTe KAKNX-NIOO TINOB pACTBOpNTeNei, KOTOpbl MOyT NOBpeDITb OTDeNKy.
  He donyckaIte nonaDaHnna NceKa B VbIeOkaMepy. Ecnn BbI cNIOJIb3yeTe BVIEOkaMepy Ha NceCuHOM PIIJKe INB KAKOM-JINBO PbIbHOM MecTe, npdeoxpaHnte annpapat ot Necka IINI PbIIN. PecOK IIIN PbIb MOrT pNIBeCTN K HeINcPabHOCTn annapata, KOtOPaH INOrDa MoKeT 6bITb HEnCpAbIMoI.

AC power adaptor

• Unplug the unit from the mains when you are not using the unit for a long time. To disconnect the mains lead, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the mains lead itself.
• Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or damaged.
• Do not bend the mains lead forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage the cord and may cause fire or electrical shock.
• Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.
• Always keep metal contacts clean.
• Do not disassemble the unit.
• Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.
• While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and video operation.
• The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.

• Do not place the unit in locations that are:

• Extremely hot or cold

• Dusty or dirty
• Very humid
  Vibrating

Battery pack

• Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function.
• To prevent accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into contact with the battery terminals.
• Keep the battery pack away from fire.
• Never expose the battery pack to temperatures above 60^ (140^) , such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.
• Keep the battery pack dry.
• Do not expose the battery pack to any mechanical shock.
• Do not disassemble nor modify the battery pack.
• Attach the battery pack to the video equipment securely.
• Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity.

Cetebo aadanTp nepemehnHO Toka

• OTcoeHNHTe annapat OT 3neKtpnueckoC CETN, ECNI OH He NCIOBb3yeTcH DNIteBHOe BpEIM. IaO tcoeHNHEH CeteBOrO SHhpa NOTHeero 3a pa3bem.HIKORda He TAnHTE 3a cam WHyP.
  He 3cknyatnpuyte annapat C noBpejXeHbIM shHypom nJn Jke B cnyae, ecnn annapat yanl nnIb 6bn nopEpxdeH.
  He cnaBaiTe CeTeBOI npoBOID CINIOI He TaBbTe Ha Iore ToXeJIbe IpEaMeTbI. 3TO NOBpeNT pNOBOI N MoKET PnBvCeTN K Noxapy uNII NOpaxeHIO 3JIeKTPuYeCKIM TOKOM.
  Будte octopokнbl,чтоби HNKakne MeTaNHueckNpeJMeTbI He COnpNKacanCb CMeTaNHueckNMI KOHTaKTAM CoeINHtJIbHOI NlaCTInbI. EcIN 3TO cNYuHcTc,TO MOKET PNO3OITNI KOPOTKoe 3aMbIKaHne, nannapAT MOXET6bITNbOBpejDeH.
  Bcerda noidepKbAte MeaJIneckne KOHTaKTbI B UcTOTE.
• He pa36upaTte annapaT.
• He noDBepraIte annapaT mexaHueckoBn6paunu HpeponyTe erO.
• Ppi nCnOJb3ObaHm annapaTa,OCo6eHNO BO BpeM 3apJdkn, DePxNITe erO NOdaJIbwe OT npIeMHNKOB AM-paIIOBeeUaHn BVdeOanpaTpybl. PpiMeHHKn AMpAIOBeeUaHn BVdeOanpaTpya HApUshaOT AM-paIIOnpHem npabOt BVdeOanpaTpybl.
  B Pnoucece 3KcIpyataun annapat HarppeBaetca. 3TO RbIaTeCBA NOJIHe HOPMaJIbHbIM.
  He pa3MeuzaIe annapaT B MeCtax: -Upe3MepHo XapKINx INI XOJIOHbIX -PiNbHbIX INI Ipr3HbIX -OChEBBnAxxHbIX

Батарейнь 6лok

IcnoIb3yIte TOIbKO peKOMeHdyEmoe 3apJdHOe yCTPOrCTBO IIN BUNdeOaPnapaTpy C 3apJdHOI FyHKUeIe.
ДлгпрдOTВрашенн HeсчacTHOrO cIyчанИЗ-3a KOPOTKOrO 3aMbICAHN He ДОпУСКАТe KOHTaTKaMe TaJIHnueCkMx ПрdMeTOb C NOПИСмИ bTaPeHrO 6bloka.
- HepacnoIaraiTe 6aTapeHbI 6Jok B6JIu3nOrHa.
He npDBepraTe 6aTapeHbI bLOK Bo3dJICTBnIO TEMpepaTyC bIIe 60°C, HApIMep, B npNapKOBaHHOM IOI COJIHcEM aBTOMOJIne IINI POI pRmbl COMOLHEyHbIM CBETOM.
-Поддерживаiteбатаразейньий блokВсухом Вида.
- He noDBepraIte 6aTapeiHbI 6Jok BO3DeIeCTBnIO KaKnx-JIbO MExaHnuecknx yIapOB.
- He pa36bpaTne n He BnDOn3MeHraTe 6aTapeiHbI 6Jok.
-Прикpenлгenteбатарейнь 6лok к BИдоаannapatypeплотно.
3aJaKa B Cnyaue octabuiecra EMKoCTn 3apJa He OtpaKaetcHa eMkoCTn nepBOHaaybHOrO 3apJa.

Notes on dry batteries

To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:

• Be sure to insert the batteries with the + - polarities matched to the + - marks.
• Dry batteries are not rechargeable.
• Do not use a combination of new and old batteries.
• Do not use different types of batteries.
• Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time.
• Do not use leaking batteries.

If batteries are leaking

• Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries.
• If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water.
• If the liquid get into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a doctor.

If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.

HΦopMaunno yxOdy 3a annapaTom mepbl npdeoctoPOKHOCTN

PpimechaHnK cyxM 6aTapeiKaM

Bo n36eKaHne Bo3MOxHOro noBpeXdEHHa BnDEOKaMepb BCNeDCTBnE yTeuKn BHyTpeHHeRo BeueCTBa 6aTaapeek nn Kopp03nn Co6JIoudaJTe CJeDuOSee:

• Пи установке батуарек собладитправлбую полярноctь + -В COOTBETCTBIMС MEТКAMN +-.
  Cuyxie 6aTaepKn HnB3n nepe3apKaTb.
• He nCnoJIb3yIte HOBIIe 6aTapeKn BmecTe coCTapblM.
• He ncpoJIb3yIte 6aTaapeKn pa3HOrO Tuna.
• Ecπn 6aTapeKn He nCnoJb3yIOTcAДПnteJbHoe Bpemr, OHI NOCTeNeHHo pa3PaxaIOTc.
• He ncpnoIb3yIe 6aTapeiKn, KOTOpBIE nOteKJIn.

EcIn npOn3oUna yTeUka BHyTpEnHero BeuecTb6aTaapeek

-Перед Tem,Кak 3amehntb 6aTapeeKn, TuaTeIbHNO pOtpNTe OCTaTKN KUdkoCTN B OTeKe DnA 6aTapeeK.
B cnyuae nonaadaHn JnkocTn Ha Koxy, npomTe JnkocTb BOdoi.
Bcnyae nonaadaHn Jnkocstn B rna3a, npomTe cBoi rna3a 60JIbIIM KOJIuYeCTBOM BObl, nOcne yero oBaPaNTEcb K BpaCy.

B clyae Bo3HKnHOBeHn KaKnx-JI6o np6Jem, OTKNoHTe BaUy BuDeOkaMepy O T nCTouHnKa IITaHnI N o6paTntEcB B 6LnXaIuN CepBnchbl ueHtp Sony.

Video camera recorder

System

Video recording system

2 rotary heads

Helical scanning system

Audio recording system

Rotary heads, PCM system

Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32kHz

stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits

(Fs 48 kHz, stereo)

Video signal

PAL colour, CCIR standards

Usable cassette

Mini DV cassette with the Mini DV mark printed

Tape speed

SP: Approx. 18.81mm / s

LP: Approx. 12.56mm / s

Recording/playback time (using cassette DVM60)

SP: 1 hour

LP: 1.5 hours

Fastforward/rewind time (using cassette DVM60)

Approx. 1 min. and 45 seconds (AC power adaptor)

Approx. 2 min. and 30 seconds (battery pack)

Viewfinder

Electric viewfinder (colour)

Image device

1/4 inch CCD (Charge Coupled Device)

Approx. 800,000 pixels

(Effective: Approx. 400,000 pixels)

Lens

Combined power zoom lens

Filter diameter 30mm (1 3/16 in.)

10 × (Optical), 40 × (Digital)

Focal length

3.3 - 33 mm (5/32 - 1 5/16 in.)

When converted to a 35mm still camera

42 - 420 mm (1 11/16 - 16 5/8 in.)

Colour temperature

Auto, HOLD (Hold), Indoor (3200K), Outdoor (5800K)

Minimum illumination

5 lux (F 1.7)

0 lux (in the NightShot mode)**

**Objects unable to be seen due to the dark can be shot with infrared lighting.

Output connectors

S video output

4-pin mini DIN

Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced

Chrominance signal: 0.3Vp - p

75 ohms, unbalanced

Audio/Video output

AV MINI JACK, 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, sync negative

327mV (at output impedance

more than 47 kilohms)

Output impedance with less than

2.2 kilohms/Stereo minibjack (ø 3.5mm)

DV output

4-pin connector Headphone jac

Stereo minijack ( 3.5mm)

LANC control jack

Stereo mini-minijack ( 2.5mm)

MIC jack

Minijack, 0.388mV low impedance

with 2.5 to 3.0VDC output

impedance 6.8 kilohms (0 3.5 mm)

Stereo type

LCD screen

Picture

3.5 inches measured diagonally

72.4 × 50.4 ~mm (2 7 / 8 × 2 in.)

Total dot number

DCR-TRV8E: 105,380 (479× 220)

DCR-TRV10E: 184,580 (839× 220)

General

Power requirements

7.2 V (battery pack)

8.4 V (AC power adaptor)

Average power consumption

(when using the battery pack)

During camera recording using LCD

DCR-TRV8E: 3.6 W

DCR-TRV10E:3.7W

Viewfinder

2.9 W

Operating temperature

0^ to 40^ (32°F to 104°F)

Storage temperature

-20^ to +60^ (-4^ to +140^)

Dimensions (Approx.)

67.5× 89× 157.5mm

(23 / 4× 35 / 8× 61 / 4 in.) (w / h / d)

Mass (approx.)

DCR-TRV8E:

630 g (1 lb 6

DCR-TRV10E:

650 g (1 lb 6 oz)

excluding the battery pack, cassette

and shoulder strap

DCR-TRV8E:

730 g (1 lb 9 oz)

DCR-TRV10E:

750g (1 lb 10 oz)

including the battery pack,

NP-FM50, cassette DVM60, lens cap

and shoulder strap

Supplied accessories

See page 5.

AC power adaptor

Power requirements

100-240VAC,50/60Hz

Power consumption

23 W

Output voltage

DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the

operating mode

Operating temperature

0^ to 40^ (32^ to 104^)

Storage temperature

-20^ to +60^ (-4^ to +140^)

Dimensions (approx.)

125× 39× 62mm

(5× 19 / 16× 21 / 2 in.) (w / h / d)

excluding projecting parts

Mass (approx.)

280 g (9.8 oz)

excluding mains lead

Cord length (approx.)

Mains lead: 2m (6.6 feet)

Connecting cord: 1.6m (5.2 feet)

Battery pack

Output voltage

DC 7.2 V

Capacity

8.5 Wh

Dimensions (approx.)

38.2 × 20.5 × 55.6 ~mm

(19 / 16 × 13 / 16 × 21 / 4 in.)

(w/h/d)

Mass (approx.)

76 g (2.7 oz)

Type

Lithium ion

Memory Stick

(DCR-TRV10E only)

Memory

Flash memory

4MB: MSA-4A

Operating voltage

2.7-3.6V

Power consumption

Approx. 45mA in the operating mode

Approx. 130 A in the standby mode

Dimensions (approx.)

50× 2.8× 21.5mm

(2× 1 / 8× 7 / 8 in.) (w / h / d)

Mass (approx.)

4 g (0.14 oz)

Design and specifications are

subject to change without notice.

Texhnueckne xapaKtepncnkn

Bvdeokamepa

CnCTema

CnCTema BnDeo3annc

2BpauoouneecraTOLOBK

CnCTemaHaKIOHHO

mexaHnuecko pa3BepTKn

Cnctema aydn03annc

Bpaaioiuee rnoOBkn, cnCTema UKM

DnckpeTn3a:126ntOB

(CDnur qachto32 kFt, cTepeo 1, cTepeo 2). 16 bitob (CDnur

chaTObI 48 KfU, cTepeo)

BndeocnHa

LBeToBOb CnHAn PAL, cTaHapT MKKP

IcnoJb3yeMbIe KacceTbl

KACCETBIMNHDVcpeaTHbIM 3HAKOMMnD

CKopoctbJIeHTbl

SP: npn6n3. 18,81 MM/c

LP: npn6n3. 12,56 mm/c

ВерmaЗапис//Bocnpo3beDEHnA (PnH NcNoJIb3OBAHn Kaccetbl DVM60)

SP:14ac

LP: 1.5 yaca

Bpema yckopeneHHo nepeMOTkn BnpeH/na3a#

(pnncnoIb3OBAHmKaccTebl DVM60)

Пибнз.3.1 МИ. 45 СЕ. (сетевоаадтэнпег佩мен HorOToKa)

Pn6Iu3.2MmH.n 30 cek.

(6aTaepHbIb 6IOK)

BudonckateJIb

3NeKTPnueckCN BUNOONCKaTeNb (LBETHOH)

ΦopMnpoBaTeIb n3o6paXeHn

1/4-IOIMOBII3C（npM60c 3aPBOB8CB3bO)

Пибпз.800 000 ZIEMeHToB 1306paxehn

ABTOPERyJINPOBaHne,HOLD

(6JIOKINPOBka), B NOMEUeHn

(3200K), Ha ylne (5800K)

MIMIMAbhA OcbueeHHOCTb 5Jk (F1,7)

0 nK (B pexkme HocHOn cbeMKn)**

** Cbemky obeketOB, HEBNIMbIX B TEMHOTe, MOXHO BblNOJHRTb C NOMOsbIO NHppaKpachORO OCBEUHIN.

Pa3bEmbl BbIXOndhix CnHaJIOB

S Bndeo

4-UTbIPbKOBOe MHHI-Rhe3do DIN

CunHan npKoCTn: pa3Max 1 B, 75

OM, HecMMepnHybI

CnHAIJI ζβEHTOCTm:pa3max0,3B,75OM,HEcIIMMETNIHbI

BbIXoD cnHana ayuNo/BnDeo

AV MINI JACK, pa3max cunhana 1

B,7O M,HeCIMMpeHbIIN, CINXPOHN3IPOBAHHI

OTPiataTeBHyI NOJIoc 327 MB

（PnIPOJHOMBbIXOJHOM

cnpotnBneHm 6oJIe YEM 47 KJNOOM

Понhoe Вьхонhoe coprotublenhe MeHee 2,2KNooM/

CTpeoOHmueckoe MmH-rHe3do (0 3,5 MM

DV BBIXoD uΦpOBOrO

BndeocnHa

4-巾TbipbKOBBpa3bem

The3o roIobhIX TeIeOHOB

CTepeofoHnueckoe MmHn-rHe3do (0 3,5 MM)

THe3do ynpabLeHnA LANC

CtepeoΦoHueCKoe MmHn-Γhe3do

(0 2,5 MM)

THe3doMIC

MnHr3do,0,388 MB,Hn3Koe
noHoe conpoTnBHeNe O T 2,5 Do
3,O B noCToHHoro ToKa,BbIXoHDoe
noHoe coPOnTnBHeNe 6,8 KOM (
3,5 MM)

CtepeofoHueckn TIN

3KpaHKKd

N306paXeHne

3,5IOIma nO dnaorohann

72,4×50,4MM

O6Jee KOJIyueCTBO 3NeMeHToB N3o6paxKeHHa

DCR-TRV8E: 105380 (479× 220)

DCR-TRV10E: 184580 (839× 2)

06uee

Tpe6oBaHnK nHTaHmIO

7,2B (6aTapeHbI 6JIOK)

8,4 B (ceTeBOI aIaITeP

NepemehHoro TOka)

CpeHnA noptpe6IeMaM MOUHOCTb

(πρι ΚΝΟλβ3ΟΒαΗN)

6bataeHoro 6JIOka)

BoBpe3aepn BnDeoKamepoe C nOmoUbO XKJd

DCR-TRV8E:3.6BT

DCR-TRV10E:3.7BT

BudonckaTeNa

2,9 B

Pa6o7a TemnepaTpa

OT0°Cdo40°C

TemnepaotypxpaheHNA

OT-20°C dO +60°C

Pa3mepb（npn6n3.）

67.5× 89× 157.5MM (U/B/r)

Bec (npn6n3.)

DCR-TRV8E:

630

DCR-TRV10E:

650

HeBKIOUa6aTapeINb6IOK, KACcETyNpIeBvOpeMH

DCR-TRV8E:

730

DCR-TRV10E:

750

BKNIOUa 6aTapeHb 6nok NPFM50, kaccTeY DVM60 nIneYeOBpeMHb

Ppnilaraemble npHaJdxKHOCTN

CM. cTp. 5.

CteBoa aanTep nepemehHoro TOka

Tpe6oBaHnK nntaHnIO

100-240 B nepemehHoro Toka, 50/60 Γu

Notpe6JIaERMa MOUHOCTb 23BT

BbIXoHoe HapRjXeHne

DC OUT: 8.4 B; 1.5 A b pa6o7em pejimke

Pa6o7aT emnepatypa

OT 0^ do 40^

TemnepatypxaheHHa

OT-20°Cdo+60°C

Pa3mepbl (npn6Jn3.)

125× 39× 62MM (W/B/r)

He BKJIOUyA BbICTyNaIOUne YactN

Bec (npn6n3.)

280r

He BKJIIOUaCteBOI uHyp

Диннашура (приблз.)

Cetebo shyp: 2 M

CoeHHTeBHy:1,6M

BaTapeiHbI 6JIOK

BbIXoHoe HnpaXeHne

DC7,2B

EMKOCtB

8.5BT-4

Pa3mepbl (npn6n3.)

38,2× 20,5× 55,6 MM

Bec (npu6n3.)

76

Tun

JIITNUEBO-NOHHbI

Memory Stick (ToJbKo MoeJIb DCR-TRV10E)

NamATb

Miraioua naMATb

4 M6: MSA-4A

Pa6oyee HappxKeHne

2,7-3,6B

Notpe6JemaM MoUHOCTb

Пибш.45 mВ pa6ochem pexime

Viewfinder lens adjustment lever (p. 23)
2 OPEN button (p. 20)
3 SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 44, 87)
4 PHOTO button (p. 41, 106)
5 BATT release lever (p. 12)
6 PROGRAM AE button (p. 57)
7 EXPOSURE button (p. 59)

This mark indicates that this product is a genuine accessory for Sony video products. When purchasing Sony video products, Sony recommends that you purchase accessories with this "GENUINEVIDEO ACCESSORIES"mark.

Mini Dv Digital Cassette

CITT Cassette Memory

InfoLITHIUM

MEMORY STICK

1 Pbyiar perylnpoBkn o6beKtNa BnOncKaTeJIa (cTp. 23)
2 Khonka OPEN (cTp. 20)
3ДиCKSEL/PUSH EXEC (ctp.44,87)
4 Khonka PHOTO (ctp. 41, 106)
5 Pbyar oCbo6oxJeHH BAATT (ctp. 12)
6 Khonka PROGRAM AE (cTp. 57)
7 Khonka EXPOSURE (cTp. 59)

Focus ring (p. 60)
9 Camera recording lamp (p. 20)
10 Infrared rays emitter (p. 28, 40)
11 Microphone
FOCUS switch (p. 60)
Viewfinder (p. 12, 23)
14 Display window (p. 167)
Remote sensor (p. 164)
16 BACK LIGHT button (p. 27)
17 FADER button (p. 47)

8 KoJIbIcOΦOKycuPObKn (ctp. 60)
9 Namna 3aHncn BIndeokamepb (ctp.20)
10 M3nyaTeIb uHΦpaKpaChbIX Lyuei (cTp. 28, 40)
11 Minkpofoh
12 NpekeKJIouaTeIbFOCUS(cTp.60)
13 BvOncKaTeJIb (CTp. 12, 23)
14 Okowko dncnner (ctp. 167)
15Дачник Дистанционногу упавлени (стр. 164)
16 Khonka BACK LIGHT (cTp. 27)
17 Khonka FADER (cTp. 47)

18 LCD screen (p. 22)
[19] LCD BRIGHT buttons (p. 22)
20 VOLUME buttons (p. 33)
21 RESET button (p. 136)
22 MEMORY PLAY button (p. 114, 119) (DCR-TRV10E only)
23 MEMORY INDEX button (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 115)
24 MEMORY + button (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 114, 119)
25 MEMORY - button (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 114., 119)
26 MEMORY DELETE button (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 124)

18 3KpaH KkD (ctp.22)
19 Khonk LCD BRIGHT (cTp. 22)
20 Khonkn VOLUME (cTp. 33)
[21] Khonka RESET (ctp. 136)
22 KhoNka MEMORY PLAY (TOnbKO MoJeJIb DCR-TRV10E) (cTp. 114, 119)
23 Khonka MEMORY INDEX (TOJIbKO MOJeJIb DCR-TRV10E) (ctp. 115)
24 Khonka MEMORY + (TOnbKO MoJeB DCRTRV10E) (ctp. 114, 119)
25 Khonka MEMORY - (ToIbKO MoIeJIb DCR-TRV10E) (cTp. 114, 119)
26 Khonka MEMORY DELETE (TOlbKO MOdeJIb DCR-TRV10E) (cTp. 124)

27 SELFTIMER button (p. 30)
28 END SEARCH button (p. 31)
29 DISPLAY button (p. 34)
30 START/STOP MODE switch (p. 25)
31 DIGITAL EFFECT button (p. 52, 63)
32 TITLE button (p. 80)
33 MENU button (p. 44, 87)
34 Speaker

[27] Khonka SELFTIMER (cTp. 30)
28 Khonka END SEARCH (ctp. 31)
29 Khonka DISPLAY (cTp. 34)
30 Пеклочаюb START/STOP MODE (ctp.25)
31 Khonka DIGITAL EFFECT (ctp. 52, 63)
32 Khonka TITLE (cTp. 80)
33 Khonka MENU (ctp. 44, 87)
34 DnHaMnK

35 Power zoom lever (p. 24)
36 ACCESS lamp (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 102)
37 Hooks for shoulder strap
38 START/STOP button (p. 20)
39 LASER LINK button (p. 40)
40 EDITSEARCH buttons (p. 31)
Lock (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 21)
42 POWER switch (p. 20)

35 Pbyar npBnBOJHO Bapnoo6bekTnBa (cTp.24)
36Ламноца ACCESS (ToIbKO moJeNb DCR-TRV10E) (cTp. 102)
37 KpOyOK nIpyIpeyeBOrOpemHn
38 Khonka START/STOP (cTp. 20)
39 Khonka LASER LINK (cTp. 40)
40 Khonkn EDITSEARCH (ctp. 31)
41ФИКСАТОР(TоЛько моДель DCR-TRV10E)(cтр.21)
42пеклоча无力 POWER (ctp. 20)

Attaching the shoulder strap

Attach the shoulder strap supplied with your camcorder to the hooks for the shoulder strap.

PpIKpenIeHne IJIeueBOro pemHa

PnKpeNITe PneueBoPemeHb, npIaRaembl K BaWeB BnDeOkaMepe, K KpUoykam DnI PneueBOr pemHa.

What is LASER LINK?

The LASER LINK system sends and receives pictures and sound between video equipment

having the 工 mark by using infrared rays.

4tro takoe LASER LINK?

CnCTema LASERLINKnocbjnaet npinHmaet cnHaJIbI n3o6paKeHnI 3Byka MeJky BIndeoannapaTpyoi, mHeIoUeI 3NaK , C nOmoBIO INHpaKpachBxIyuei.

43 Video control buttons (p. 36)

STOP (stop)
REW (rewind)
PLAY (playback)
FF (fastforward)
PAUSE (pause)

The control buttons light up when you set the POWER switch to PLAYER.

44 MEMORY OPEN button
(DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 102)
45 MEMORY RELEASE button
(DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 102)
46 Intelligent accessory shoe (p. 76, 163)
47 +SLOW SHTR button (p. 28)
48 NIGHTSHOT switch (p. 28)
49 Grip strap

43 KhONKN BnDEOKOHpOJIa (ctp. 36)

STOP (ocTaHOBka)
REW (yckopeHHa npeMoTka Ha3a,I)
PLAY (Bocnpon3BeJeHne)
FF (yckopeHHa nepemOTka Bnpei)
PAUSE (nay3a)

KhONk KOHTpOJIy BbICBeHnBaIOTc npi yCTaHOBKe nepeKJIouChaTeIa POWER B noLoXeHne PLAYER.

44 KHonka MEMORY OPEN
(TOJIbKO MOJeJIb DCR-TRV10E) (cTp. 102)
45 Khonka MEMORY RELEASE
(TOJIbKO MOdEJIb DCR-TRV10E) (cTp. 102)
46ДерхаTeьдЯ BCNOMORAteьHbIX
npuHaadJeKHoCTe (cTp.76,163)
47 Khonka +SLOW SHTR (CTp. 28)
48 NipeekJIIOHateJIb NIGHTSHOT (ctp. 28)
49 PemeNbДЯЗaXBaTa

Fastening the grip strap

PpNkpeHnTe peMeHb dIa 3aXbata.

50 DV OUT jack (p. 73)
This "i.LINK" mark is a trademark of Sony Corporation and indicates that this product is in agreement with IEEE 1394-1995 specifications and their revisions.
The DV OUT jack is i.LINK compatible.
51 (headphones) jack
When you use headphones, the speaker on your camcorder is silent.
52 LANC control jack
LANC stands for Local Application Control Bus System. The control jack is used for controlling the tape transport of video equipment and other peripherals connected to the video equipment. This jack has the same function as the jack indicated as CONTROL L or REMOTE.
53 OPEN/EJECT lever (p. 19)
54 Tripod receptacle
Make sure that the length of the tripod screw is less than 6.5mm (9/32 inch). Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod securely and the screw may damage your camcorder.
55 SVIDEO jack (p. 38, 71)
56 DC IN jack (p. 13)
57 AUDIO/VIDEO jack (p. 38, 71)
58 MIC jack (PLUG IN POWER)
Connect an external microphone (not supplied). This jack also accepts a "plug-in-power" microphone.

50 THe3do DV OUT (ctp. 73)
3нak "i.LINK"Явлиетсг Торбов Марков Корпорашу Sony u yka3blBaet Ha To,ЧТо Юразkyця COOTBETCTByeT TexHnueckm Услобим EMLE 1394-1995и nx ДОПОПЕНИМ.
Ihe3do DV OUT COBmecTnMo c KaHaJOM nepeaun ciHaJIOB iLINK.
51IHe3do（roJOBHbIeTeNeΦoHbI）
EcnBbIncNoJIb3yete rONoBHte TepeHbI, DnAMNK Ha BaWei BUneOkamepe OTKnIOuAeTcN.
52 Tne3do ynpablenLA nC
LANC 03haaet CnCTemy KaHaJa MeCTHOrO ynpableny. He3do ynpableny LNCJNtB3yeTcI JN KOTPOnla 3a nepMeueHHeM JeHTb BInDeoAnnapaTypbI INepiFepinhBxvctpoIcTB,IOKnJIuOeHHbIX K He.I DaHHOe THe3do IMeET TaKyo JKe fynKUIO, KaK i pa3bEmbl, O6o3NaueHbIe kak CONTROL L uIN REMOTE.
53 Pblar OPEN/EJECT (cTp. 19)
54 THe3doДЯТpeHOrn
Y6eINTeScb, YTO dInnHa BnHTa TpeHOrm MeHee 6,5 MM. B npOTuBOM cIyae Bbl He CMOKeTe HAdExHO pNkPepNTb TpeHory, a BnHT MoKet nobpeDntb BaUy BnDeokamepy.
55ГнeздоSVIDEO(cтр.38,71)
56 THe3do DC IN (ctp. 13)
57Гнeзда AUDIO/VIDEO (cTp.38,71)
58 THe3do MIC (PLUG IN POWER)

ДлгпоюсоевненяВьшонуМКррфога（He npinaraeTc）.ТTo rH3doТakKe
No3BOJЯТ NOT NOkKЛЮчNTb MKNрФОH“C
BvIKJIQUaTeNeM NITAHNIA”.

Note on the Carl Zeiss lens

Your camcorder is equipped with a Carl Zeiss lens which can reproduce a fine image. The lens for your camcorder was developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in Germany, and Sony Corporation. It adopts the MTF* measurement system for video camera and offers a quality as the Carl Zeiss lens.

• MTF is an abbreviation of Modulation Transfer Function/Factor.

The value number indicates the amount of light of a subject penetrating into the lens.

Примочаиме Клипзе Kapл Рецс

B BaweBnDoeOKaMepe BCtpoEHa JInh3a
Kapn Lec, KOTOPA NO3BOJAE TNOJUaTb
BbICOKOKAeCTBEHNBIE N3O6paxEHN.
JInh3a DnBaWe BnDEOKaMepbI 6bla
pa3pa6oTaHa COBMecTHO KOMnAHeN KePn
LcEic, TepMaHn I KopnpaueN Sony. OHa
OCHOBaHa Na CnCTEme N3MepHn MTF* dJa
BnDEOKaMepbI n OblaJaET KaYeCTBOM KaN
JInh3bl Kapn Lec.

• MTF 끼류ETС COKpaueHem OT Вырахеня ФункцИЯ/фakTOpпeдачИ MOduJIaIciN.

UcnIeHna BEnuHa YaKa3bIbaeT KOnIYeCTBO CBeta OObBeKTa, npOHkaIoOero Ype3 IInH3y.

Intelligent

Accessory Shoe

Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe

• The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power to optional accessories such as a video light or microphone.
• The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the POWER switch, allowing you to turn the power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the operating instructions of the accessory for further information.
• The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety device for fixing the installed accessory securely. To connect an accessory, press down and push it to the end, and then tighten the screw.
• To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and then press down and pull out the accessory.

Intelligent

Accessory Shoe

PpIMeuaHnOTHocuTeNbHOepKaTeJIaN yCTaHOBKn pUHaadJeXHoCTeI

-Держателль дуястовки пинадлесхостей подаетпитане на BCNOMORAteьнbleппинадлесхости, takne KaBUNDEONODCBETka nlin MKNPOΦOH.
- DepeKataIb IyraHOBKn PnHaJdNexKHOCTeCB3aH cpeKmOM OxuHaHnaIpeKeKnIOUaTe nb POWER, no3B0JIa Bam BkJIIOaTb N BbKJIIOUaTb NOdaBaEMoe depeKaTeIem nITaHne. PoIIOb6Hbe CBeJeHn prINBeJeHb BV HCTpyKuIN NO EKcPJIyAtaUIM BCNOMORAteNbHbIX PnHaJdNexKHOCTe.
B DepeKaTeIe Iy yCTaHOBKn BCNOMOraTeIbHbIX npiHaJIeXHoCTeIMMeETcI npEoOxpaHITeIbHoe yCTpoIcTBO Iyra HaJeXHOΦKCaUINy yCTaHOBJIeHNHO npHaJIeXHoCTn. IyI IOJcoEIHeHnI npHaJIeXHoCTn HaKMITE ee BHN3 I HAKMITE Do yNopa, a 3aTEM 3aTAHNTe BHT.
-ДЯСНТЯнпинадлжноOCla6bTe BnHT, a 3aTEM HaxmTe пинадлжноBHuN3 n NOTAHITE ee.

Remote Commander

The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder function identically to the buttons on your camcorder.

1 PHOTO button (p. 41, 106)
2 DISPLAY button (p. 34)
3 Memory control buttons (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 114, 115, 119)
4 SEARCH MODE button (p. 66, 68, 69)
5 I /buttons (p. 66, 68, 69)
6 Video control buttons (p. 36)
7 MARK button (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 75)
8 AUDIO DUB button (p. 77)
9 DATA CODE button (p. 34)
10 Power zoom button (p. 24)
11 START/STOP button (p. 20)
12 Transmitter Point toward the remote sensor to control your camcorder after turning on your camcorder.
13 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 65)

1 Khonka PHOTO (ctp. 41, 106)
2 Khonka DISPLAY (cTp. 34)
3 Khonknu npabNeHnna marnbTOJbKO moJeIb DCR-TRV10E) (ctp. 114, 115, 119)
4 Khonka SEARCH MODE (cTp. 66, 68, 69)
5 KhonknI▶/▶(ctp. 66, 68, 69)
6 KhoNKn BnDeoKoHtpOJa (ctp. 36)
7 KhoNka MARK (ToIbKO MoJeIb DCR-TRV10E) (cTp. 75)
8 Khonka AUDIO DUB (cTp. 77)
9 Khonka DATA CODE (ctp. 34)
10 KhoNka npuBODHOro BapnoooBeKtNbA (cTp. 24)
11 Khonka START/STOP (p. 20)
12 NpepaTuk HanpaBbTe Ha daTnK dIy ynpaBneHnBnDEOKamepoN oCNe BkIIOHeHnBnDEOKamepbl.
13 Khonka ZERO SET MEMORY (cTp. 65)

To prepare the Remote Commander

Insert 2 R6 (Size AA) batteries by matching the + and - polarities on the batteries to the + - marks inside the battery compartment.

ДлnoiodroTOBKn nylbTa ДиctAHUHOHOrO ynpaBJIeHnA

BcTaBbTe DBe 6aTapeiKn R6 (pa3mepa AA), co6nOdaH aIeKaUyIO nIarPhocTB + I - Ha 6aTapeiKax CO 3HaKaMn + - BHyTpN OTCeKa dIra 6aTapeek.

Notes on the Remote Commander

• Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly.
• Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid remote control misoperation. If you use another Sony VCR in the Commander mode VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with black paper.

PpmeaHnK npIbTy dNCTaHcNoHHoro ynpabJIeHn

Operation indicators

Pa60yne HndnKaTOpbl

Cassette memory indicator (p. 129)
2 Remaining battery time indicator (p. 26)
3 Zoom indicator (p. 24) /Exposure indicator (p. 59) /Data file name indicator (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 101)
4 Digital effect indicator (p. 52) /M.CHROM/ M.LUMI/C.CHROM indicator (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 119)
FLD./FRAME indicator (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 106)/16:9WIDE indicator (p. 44)/FAADER indicator (p. 47)
6 Picture effect indicator (p. 50)
7 Data code indicator (p. 34)
8 LCD bright indicator (p. 22)/Volume indicator (p. 33)
9 PROGRAM AE indicator (p. 56)
10 Backlight indicator (p. 27)
11 SteadyShot off indicator (p. 88)
12 Manual focus/Infinity indicator (p. 60)
13 Recording mode indicator (p. 91)
14 Standby/Recording indicator (p. 20) /Video control mode indicator (p. 36) /Image quality mode indicator (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 103)

1 INHdNkatop KaccetHo nAMrTn (cTp. 129)
2 INHdNkaTOp OCTaBWeOcR BpeMeH 6bTaPeHnO 6Ioka (Ctp. 26)
3 INHДИКaTOP BapNoO6bKeTnBa (CTp. 24)/ INHДИKaTOP 3KcNo3nIuN (CTp. 59)/ INHДИKaTOP H3BaHЯ DAHHbIX (TOJIbKO MOneIb DCR-TRV10E) (CTp. 101)
4 INHnKaTOp UINΦpOBOrO 3ΦΦeKTa (cTp.52)/ INHnKaTOp M.CHROM/M.LUMI/C.CHROM (ToJIbKO MoJeB DCR-TRV10E) (cTp.119)
5 INHdNkaTop FLD./FRAME (TOJbKO MOJeNb DCR-TRV10E) (ctp. 106)/INHdNkaTop pexKMa 16:9WIDE (ctp. 44)/INHdNkaTop FADER (ctp. 47)
6 INHnkaTop 3ΦΦeKta n3o6paXeHnA (cTp.50)
7Индикадр Кда даньх (cTp. 34)
8 INHnKATOp npKocTn XXk (ctp. 22)/ INHnKATOp rpomKocTn (ctp. 33)
9Инданкатор PROGRAM AE (cTp. 56)
10 INHdkaTop 3aDHei noDCBETK (cTp.27)
11 INHdIkaTop BbIKNoeHHoYcToHBOB CbeMKn (CTp.93)
12 INHdNkATOp pyHNoI φOKyCnPOBKn/6eCKoHeuHocTn (ctp. 60)
13ИнданkaToppeхимаЗпсn（ctp.96）
14 INHnKATOP OXnDaHnra/ROTOBHOCTn (ctp. 20)/nHnKATOP pEXnMa BnDEOKOHtPOna (ctp.36)/nHnKATOP pEXnMa KaYeCTBa n3o6paKeHnra (TOnbKO MoJeNb DCR-TRV10E) (ctp.103)

15 NIGHTSHOT indicator (p. 28)
Warning indicators (p. 138)
17 Tape counter indicator (p. 65)/5SEC mode indicator (p. 25)/Time code indicator (p. 26) / Self-diagnosis indicator (p. 137)/Photo mode indicator (p. 41)/Image number indicator (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 115)
Remaining tape indicator (p. 26) /Memory playback indicator (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 114)
ZERO SET MEMORY indicator (p. 65)
20 END SEARCH indicator (p. 31)
21 Audio mode indicator (p. 91)
22 Data file name indicator (DCR-TRV10E only) This indicator appears when the M.CHROM/M.LUMI/C.CHROM functions work.
23 Continuous mode indicator (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 107)
Video flash ready indicator (p. 42) This indicator appears when you use the video flash light (not supplied).
25 Self-timer indicator (p. 30)

15ИнданkaTop NIGHTSHOT (ctp. 28)
16 Pnepynpexkaioune HndkaTopbI (ctp. 146)
17 HndnkaTop cyeTnka JeHtbl (ctp. 65)/ HndnkaTop pexnma 5SEC (ctp. 25)/ HndnkaTop KOA BpeMeHH (ctp. 26)/ HndnkaTop fYHKmCamaOHaNcHocTNk (ctp. 145)/HndnkaTop FOptopExnma (ctp. 41)/HndnkaTop Homepa I3o6paXeHHa (TOJbKO MoJeNb DCR-TRV10E) (ctp. 115)
18 INHdNKaTOP OCTABWEcJIeHTbI (CTp. 26)/ INHdNKaTOP BOCPON3BeDEHnI NAMrTn (ToJIbKO MoJeJI DCR-TRV10E) (CTp. 114)
19ИндкатOP ZERO SET MEMORY (ctp.65)
20 INdikKaTop END SEARCH (cTp. 31)
21ИнданаTop abTomatnueckoro pexima (ctp.96)
22 INHdNkATOp Ha3BaHnA paJla daHHbIX (TOnbKO MoeJIb DCR-TRV10E) 3TOT INHdkaTOP NOBnAEcBO BpeMpa6oTbI cyHKnM.CHROM/M.LUMI/ C.CHROM.
23ИндикаTop HeNPepebIBHOro peXnMa daHHbIX (TOJIbKO MoJeB DCR-TRV10E) (cTp. 107)
24 INHdkaTOP FOTOBHOCTN BnDEOBcblIK (ctp. 42) 3TOT INHdkaTOP NOBJAETCR npn NCIOJIb3OBAHm BNDeOBcblIKN (He npnlaraeTc).
25 ИнданkaTop таимера самоанусяк (стр. 30)

Display window

Okowko dincpnjeA

Remaining battery time indicator (p. 13) / Tape counter (p. 65) / Memory counter (DCR-TRV10E only) (p. 115) /Time code indicator (p. 26)
2 FULL charge indicator (p. 13)
Remaining battery indicator (p. 13)

1 INHДИКATOP OCTaBweroC8 3apRda6bTapeHOrO 6JIOKa (ctp. 13)/cHTuKJIeHTbI (ctp. 65)/cHTuNK nAmrTu (TOnbKOmoJeNb DCR-TRV10E)(ctp. 115)/INHДИKATOpKoJaВPemHeN (ctp. 26)
2 INHmKAtop 3apAdkn FULL (cTp.13)
3Индикатор octabeiroc3apya 6aTapeHoro 6Ioka (ctp.13)

Functions to adjust exposure (in the recording mode)

In a dark place

NIGHTSHOT (p. 28)

• In insufficient light

Low lux mode (p. 56)

• In dark environments such as sunset, fireworks, or general night views

Sunset & moon mode (p. 56)

• Shooting backlit subjects

BACK LIGHT (p. 27)

• In spotlight, such as at the theatre or a formal event

Spotlight mode (p. 56)

• In strong light or reflected light, such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski slope

Beach & ski mode (p. 56)

Functions to give images more impact (in the recording mode)

• Smooth transition between scenes

FADER (p. 46)

• Taking a still picture

PHOTO (p. 41)

Digital processing of images

PICTURE EFFECT (p. 49)/DIGITAL EFFECT (p. 51)

• Creating a soft background for subjects

Soft portrait mode (p. 56)

Superimposing a title

TITLE (p. 79)

Functions to give a natural appearance to your recordings (in the recording mode)

• Preventing deterioration of picture quality in digital zoom

D ZOOM MENU (p. 87)

• Focusing manually

Manual focus (p. 60)

• Shooting distant subjects

Landscape mode (p. 56)

• Recording fast-moving subjects

Sports lesson mode (p. 56)

Functions to use in editing (in the recording mode)

• Watching the picture on a wide-screen TV

Wide mode (p. 44)

Viewing images using a personal computer (DCR-TRV10E only)

Memory Stick (p. 117)

Functions to use after recording (in the playback mode)

• Digital processing of recorded images

PICTURE EFFECT (p. 62)/DIGITAL EFFECT (p. 63)

• Displaying the date/time or various settings when you recorded

Data code (p. 34)

• Quickly locating a desired scene

Zero set memory (p. 65)

• Searching for scenes having a title

Title search (p. 68)

• Searching for scenes recorded in the photo mode

Photo search (p. 69)

• Scanning scenes recorded in the photo mode

Photo scan (p. 70)

• Playing back on monaural sound or sub sound

HiFi SOUND MENU (p. 87)

• Playing back the picture on a TV without connecting a cord

LASER LINK (p. 40)

PykoBoCTBO IO 6bICTpbIM yHKcIaM

PyuHaФokycupOBka (CTp.60)

CbeMka ydaJIeHHbIX 06BeKToB

JanduaФтньim pexm (CTp. 56)

-3aIINcB 6bIcTpo DnNkUxxCsO6bekTOB

Pekim cnoptnbhix coct3aHn (ctp.56)

Camera chromakey 118
Cassette memory 10, 129
Charging battery 13
Charging vanadium-lithium battery 150
Clock set 98
Connection (viewing on TV) 38 (dubbing a tape) 71
Continuous 107
Data code 34
Date search 66
DEMO. 92
DIGITAL EFFECT 51
DISPLAY 34
Dual sound track tape 130
Dubbing a tape 71
DV connecting cable. 73

E

EDITSEARCH 31
END SEARCH 31, 37
Exposure 59
External microphone (not supplied) 162

F, G, H

FADER 46
Fade in/out. 46
FLASH MOTION 51
FOCUS. 60
Format 105
Full charge 13
Grip strap 161
Heads 150
Headphone jack 162
HiFi SOUND 89

I, J, K, L

i.LINK 73
Image protection 121
Image quality mode 103
INDEX (Multiple) display .... 115
"InfoLITHIUM" battery 17
Infrared rays emitter 28, 40
JPEG 101
Labeling a cassette 85
LANC 162
LASERLINK 40
LCD screen 22
LUMINANCEKEY 51

M, N

Main sound 89
Manual focus 60
Memory chromakey 118
Memory luminancekey 118
Memory Stick 100
Menu settings 87
Mirror mode 22
Moisture condensation 149
MONOTONE 46
Mosaic fader 46
NIGHTSHOT 28
NightShot +Slow shutter 28
Normal charge 13

O, P, Q

OLD MOVIE 51
Operation indicators 166
OVERLAP 46
PAL system 148
Photo scan 70
Photo search 69
Photo recording 41
PICTURE EFFECT 49
Picture search 36
Playback pause 36
Power sources
(the mains) 18
(car battery) 18
(battery pack) 12
Power zoom 24
Printmark. 123
PROGRAM AE 56

R

Rec review 32
Recording time 15
Remaining battery time indicator 26
Remaining tape indicator 26
Remote commander 164
Remote control jack (LANC) 162
Remote sensor 157
RESET 136

s

S video jack 38, 71
Self-diagnosis display 137
Self-timer recording 30
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial 156
Serial port adaptor 117
Shoulder strap 160
Skip scan 36
Slide show 127
Slow playback 36
SLOW SHUTTER 51
+SLOW SHTR 28
START/STOP MODE 25
STEADYSHOT 88
Stereo tape 130
STILL 51
Sub sound 89

T, U, V

Tape counter 26, 65
Telephoto 24
Time code 26
Title 79
Title search 68
TRAIL 51
Transition 21
TV colour systems 148

W,X,Y,Z

Warning indicators 138
Wide-angle 24
Wide mode 44
WORLD TIME 92
Write-protect tab 19
Zero set memory 65
Zoom 24

AлфаВиТьи yka3aTeЛb

A, B, Γ

AanTep noCneIOBaTeIbHoro npota 117

Aydnopepe3aHcB 76

Aydnopejkm 91

BaTapeiHbI 6Jok 12

BVeDeHnE/BbIBeDeHnE n3o6paXeHnA 46

BHeuHmMnKpOΦoH (He npUlaeTc) 162

Bpem3aHcN 15

BcnoMoraTeIbHbI 3ByK ....89

TolOBkn 150

THe3do roJOnOBhBx TeNeoHOB .. 162

THe3DoIInCTaHcUHOHHoR OynpaBLeHnA(LANC) 162

Tne3do S Bndeo 38,71

A,E,X,3

I3roTOBnteJIb: CoH KOpnpoeiHN

Ampec: 6-7-35 Kitaunharaba,

山HaraBa-Ky, Tokno 141-0001, JnOhna

CtpaHa-mpOn3BovnteJIb:JnoHnIa